Home

Intelligent Video Processing

1. cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 163 H 2 3 OIG ON ea E ead nsaasn et wetaceaceaces 164 Appendix I Supported IP Cameras cccccseceeeeeeeeeeesneeenesensenesenesenes 165 1 1 NTN 3 OL sapere shes crntecigneei EAE REER 165 2 ASO UG KA HCM sorte curecins wo es eiea e aE E 165 l3 PONS AOT a E A A A AE EAE E EAE 166 4 PONS 22 E E A E E E E EE E E A A 166 5 PAS DANO en ne me ene en ee ee 166 Appendix J ATM Integration ssssss sssssrs ssrsassrs nnrn nn rn nn RR RR ARA RAA A ARA RR RAA R 167 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 vii Intelligent Video Processing Vill plettac FXL v4 4 OVO CW E E ET T A E EE E A cceadeaveect 168 Programming Your ATM sissies ERE 168 Making ATM and Multiplexor Settings Available ccccecceeeee ees 169 Configuring ATM Integration msmnosssssressrssresrrssrrssrrnr rens rrr rens rss rs rer r rn nr an 169 Multiplexor configuration ssmossessresrressrrsrrrssranrrrrrrrr rar rrr rr rr rar rn r rr nr rann ann 169 AFM COMMU AVON a2 accucateiudegusdestariersanddevanducamutdcenedssinedsecnedieeiadaanailecbunrs 171 Purge Old ATM Transaction Recordings cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 173 Save and Load Configuration cccccecccsececceeeeececaeeeeeeceseeeeeeeesaees 173 Accessing ATM Transaction Search cccccccceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaes 173 Simple Searches sssrini anen eE AOA EE NEEE 173 Refining transaction SCarChes cc
2. c cece ecceeeceeeceeceeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeaeeseeeaeeeaes 78 Acknowledging VMD Events sssessessssrerrsrrerresresrrrrerrerrrn rer ers rr rr er rerna nan 18 Pan Tilt Zoom Functionality osmessrssrsesrerrsrerrererranrerrererrrrrer ennen rer ror rn rr nr aren 79 Configuration Of PTZ cameras sissosssssressresrersresrrrsrrerrrrr rer rrrn rer r rn ran rr annan 80 PTZ CONTONE MOQO eiere EE 81 PTZ Function Key configuration cccccccccssecceececeeeeceeceseeeeseeeeseeeeanees 82 Joystick control Of PTZ functions ssmessesssrssrrrrrsrresrrerrrrrrerrrsr rens ren r enn enn r rann 83 Video Streamer eesocisceesecnearvesnetdvecuesencccdcuserevatinsiets EEan n EEEE s 83 Enabling the Ole aN Gl secarei ei ninni 84 Connecting to a streaming plettac Sentio server mmsmssssssesrsssrorresrresr en an 85 The Master Streaming Client nissssmmssrsssessrsrresrrenrrnrrenr renen rr rrrr nro r rr nr ann 86 Enabling streaming to Pocket PC Clients ccccecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 Client View Of streaming ccccccccseeeeceseeceeeeceeeesneeeseeeseeeeesaeeeseeeesaees 86 Optional Features in Live Mode ccceeceeeceseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeetaeees 87 19 March 2009 y Intelligent Video Processing vi plettac FXL v4 4 Chapter 10 Playback Mode Operations ssssssssssssssrssrssrnnrnnnnn nn nn rn rn 2 nn gt 89 10 1 Accessing Playback nsosnossssessessrrrrrsrerrsssanrarrrn rensar rerna rr rr rann rr rr RAR
3. Camera 08 Always 25 176 x 144 QCIF 0 39 Camera 09 Default 720 x 288 2CIF BI RI BI RI BIR I Camera 10 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF a 6 25 Camera 11 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 12 NISISISISISNSISISSISISIS Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 NININGAININININIATS si elle J Total 60 20 About CLOSE APPLICATION Figure 2 5 ww The plettac Sentio server s Configuration Console You can also access the Configuration Console using the NetManager application although not using Net ManagerLite 1 8 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual The plettac User Interface 2 11 1 Layout of the Configuration Console The Configuration Console consists of a series of tabbed menus that you can use to modify the operations of the plettac Sentio server The number of menus varies depending on the production options that you have installed At a minimum the Configuration Console includes the following menus e Cameras e Event e VMD e Preview e Patrol e Capacity e Schedules e Engineering e Log e Sequencer if installed e Audio e PTZ only if enabled e Users e Options e Suspicious Alarms e CSD Camera Sabotage Detection only if enabled 2 11 2 Buttons of the Configuration Console The buttons at the bottom of the Configurat
4. fe Search Wy gt f plettac Camera U1 on server Alp Camera 03 Camera 04 Select Media Bar settings P You clicked an audio or video link Internet Explorer can play this 7 inite own window so twill be easier for you to see or hear it while shill browsing the Web Do vou want to play the tem in Internet Explorer Remember my preference es Moo More Info Figure 9 11 Opening a Streaming client connection PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 85 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 9 6 3 The Master Streaming Client The first PC based streaming client to connect to the server becomes the master client Only this client can select which camera s images are streamed by the server All other clients receive the images from the cam era view chosen by the master client Streaming Cameras Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back x B A a Search 5 Favorites GA Media LJ plettac Camera O1 on server Alp Camera U2 Camera 03 Figure 9 12 Selecting a camera view to be streamed 9 6 3 1 Selecting the Current Video Stream As the user of the Master Streaming client you select the camera view that is streamed by the plettac Sentio Server Initially Camera01 s images are streamed by default To change the video stream use your mouse or tab and cursor keys to select a camera from the drop down list under the display panel and cl
5. amp plettac AppenvixE Remote Control Commands This appendix provides information on special commands that you can use with specific types of Pan Tilt Zoom or Dome cameras It comprises the following sections e E 1 Remote Commands e E 2 Pelco PTZ Cameras e E 3 MCI Emulation Commands E 1 Remote Commands The remote control interface currently supports the following telemetry commands to query information from and control operations to the plettac sentiO server over an RS232 serial link or a TCP link Command String Function Alarm Acknowledge n where n is the camera number 1 to 16 o Alarm Set Initiate n where n is the alarm input number 1 to 16 CSc a Select camera c to be displayed in area a where c is 1 to 16 and a is 0 zero to the number of views on display DTdatetime Sets the playback start point lt datatime gt is specified in ISO date order without separator characters for example DT20020307131015 specifies 7 March 2002 at 10 minutes and 15 seconds after 1PM FullScreen n 0 GUI Windows 1 Full Screen Login using the specified Username and Password for remote host access change to Live mode move forwards to the Next Event Output Volume change to Playback mode Move backwards to the Previous Event Print Screen Quit the IVMS application must have administrator privilege n 9 To shutdown SCh u p n Server Connect h host ip address u UserName p PassWord n HostName Set playback Spee
6. 09 05 Dec 16 17 18 Suspicious f 10 05 Dec 16 17 18 Alarm B11 05 Dec 16 17 18 Alarm S 2 09 O05 Dec 16 14 36 Suspicious fD 10 05 Dec 16 14 22 Alarm of 11 05 Dec 16 14 22 Alarm f 10 05 Dec 14 21 38 Alarm of 11 05 Dec 14 21 38 Alarm 5 l 09 05 Dec 14 05 38 Suspicious e 09 05 Dec 13 54 57 Suspicious of 10 05 Dec 13 5 _ 7 Alarm i 11 05 Dec 13 lType Suspicious Alarm Alarm Input 9 05 DecO3 13 51 57 CameraList 1 16 JB 09 05 Dec 13 5T USpIcious JB 09 05 Dec 13 50 10 Suspicious 09 05 Dec 13 23 33 Suspicious 8 09 0S5 Dec 13 23 09 Suspicious of 11 05 Dec 13 22 16 Alarm f 10 05 Dec 13 22 15 Alarm f 09 05 Dec 13 21 49 Alarm f 09 05 Dec 13 21 07 Alarm f 10 04 Dec 17 26 55 Alarm fD 10 04 Dec 17 26 54 Alarm fD 11 04 Dec 17 26 54 Alarm 11 04 Dec 17 26 49 Alarm ih 10 14 Ner 17 26 40 Alarm DATE Figure 1 Starting the Event Review utility Passing the mouse pointer over any entry in the Event Reviewer displays a summary of the event details as a tooltip which disappears after 5 seconds as shown in Figure 10 8 The tooltip shows the event type the alarm input or camera that triggered it the time it was triggered and the cameras associated with it 10 6 2 Selecting Event types for display By default when you open the Event Review utility only two types of event are listed in the left hand pane Contact Alarms and Suspicious Alarms Depending on your p
7. Configuring VMD for a Camera on page 45 for more information To reduce the amount of data recorded on disk you can configure the plettac Sentio server to record from cer tain cameras only when VMD events occur See section 6 2 Basic VMD Configuration on page 44 for more information 4 9 Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD To enable Camera Sabotage Detection CSD for a camera click the CSD field until a check symbol U appears This enables the system to detect whether a camera has been moved defocussed or obscured For further information see section 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD on page 125 4 10 Previewing Video Quality To familiarise yourself with the various video quality settings available on the plettac Sentio server use the Preview tab of the Configuration Console Use the following procedure 1 On the Preview tab select the button for the camera name you wish to preview 2 Inthe Compression Quality field use the spinner arrows to select the video quality you want to preview 3 Use the Image Adjustment controls to modify the brightness contrast and saturation of the displayed image 32 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Analogue Camera Configuration 4 Click the Preview Recording button This opens a new window in which you see live images from the selected camera view displayed at the selected quality as shown in Figure 4 3 I Preview Test 2 a X a
8. nd 2 Events Operational Activities Confi guration Activities Jisplay All About CLOSE APPLICATION Figure 8 3 Log of Events sorted in descending order of code Managing User Accounts Any user with Administrator or Manager privileges can create and modify accounts for other users of the plettac Sentio system and control which features of the product are available to different user groups By default plettac Sentio IVMS servers do not have any password protection on installation Once your server has been set up you should open the Users tab of the Configuration Console and enable password protec tion for the default account names To do this click in the Password Protection field of the Access Rights panel an example is illustrated below Cameras p Cameras Event io Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering am Audio prz Users lotions Suspicious csp Users and Groups Administrator Playback ee Standard User SSO Configuration Dual Authentication Table 8 3 shows the default user account names passwords and privileges for your plettac Sentio server User Password Privileges Administrator Administrator Administrator Table 8 3 Default User Accounts Initially the only user account with access to the Configuration Console is Administrator For security reasons it is essential that you modify the initial password of this account once the system has
9. 3 SIT jasa pes ea feces 7 p c Select the ips rate and recording quality for the cameras during the time they are to record Refer to Chapter 4 Analogue Camera Configuration on page 27 for information about recording rates and quality Interval bys Gan facie ail SAE E Start End IPS Quali Alarm VMD je 171524 2345 fi i uO d Select either or both check boxes for Alarm or VMD if you want to record only when an event occurs Interval FESTENS EE a Start End IPS Quality Alarm YMO w wv iv 17 15 23 45 1 4 Vv v NOTE You cannot select a 0 zero ips rate without also checking the Alarm or VMD checkbox The example in Figure 7 2 shows this scenario which is ideal for event based recording Refer to Chapter 6 Event Based Recording on page 43 for more information e Click the New Interval button to display the information on the grid m Interval 7 MT WThF SS Start End IPS Quality Alarm VMD Prerrr r oy pog pa pa FF Delete Interval 00 Of 02 03 04 OS 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Monday Monday Figure 7 2 Example of an interval added to a schedule f Repeat these steps until all the required information is entered for the schedule NOTE The spinner arrows increment in 15 minute blocks and the minimum interval duration is 15 minutes 62 19 march 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Configuring Scheduled Recording 7 1 2 Modifying Schedules To modify a recordi
10. Re dial attempts after error Specify the number of times the server should re attempt to contact the client if it receives a connection error Re dial attempts if line is busy Specify the number of times the server should re attempt to contact the client if it receives a busy signal Time between re dial attempts For each re dial attempt configured for busy line signals you can configure a wait time There is little point in using up all the retries immediately Select an attempt from the drop down list and specify the number of seconds the server should wait before re attempting to contact the client Select each attempt in turn and configure a wait time for each PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 59 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 6 8 60 Table 6 6 Client Settings for Dial Up Settings 5 To define more client connections choose another client from the drop down list and configure the appropriate Client Settings fields 5 When you have defined all the client connections you need to click the OK button to commit your configuration changes For information of how this feature operates on remote clients refer to the Installation chapter of the NetMan ager User Guide Configuring Acknowledgements to Stop Recording By default the plettac Sentio server records all events for the duration specified Even if the on screen alarm is acknowledged the server continues to records the event unless the dur
11. Users Options Suspic Camera 01 3000 02 f Bits per om cma ee O 01 01 1 8 Camera 02 03 ___ Camera 04 04 Camera 10 05 Camera 08 06 None OF Camera 13 Sample 1 1 5000 6000 8000 8000 8000 08 Camera 03 6000 8000 09 Camera 11 3000 10 Camera OF 8000 11 About CLOSE APPLICATION Camera 06 Camera 09 Camera 12 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Figure 12 9 For details about configuration using the Audio menu see section 4 11 Configuring Audio Recording on page 33 12 3 Bi Directional Audio 8000 8000 ee I I I I I cancel coy Associating multiple audio channels with your cameras Bi Directional Audio BDA enables audio to be transmitted between a NetManager client and an audio equipped camera attached to the plettac server The NetManager client requires a microphone and the camera must have a speaker for audio output and optionally a microphone for audio input This feature can enable an operator to speak to people who are in the vicinity of a camera on which they appear and if the camera has an associated microphone hear requests For example if a customer leaving a car park finds that the barrier doesn t lift the NetManager user may be able to a
12. ccccceccceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 41 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual 5 6 4 5 6 5 5 T Chapter 6 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 5 6 6 6 6 1 6 7 6 8 Chapter 7 7 1 TAG 7 1 2 12 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 3 1 8 4 8 4 1 8 4 2 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 Chapter 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 5 1 9 5 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 9 6 9 6 1 9 6 2 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 7 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD J sssssssssrrsressrerrisrresrrrra0 41 Enabling Archiving of recorded iMagQes ccccceseececeeeeseeeeseeseeeeseeees 41 Enabling Alarm Switch Recording ccceeccseecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees 42 Event BaSed Recording c sccsscceeeeeeceeneeeeeeeseeneeenesanseeneeeeees 43 Dlettac System Events mlssossesseessessressrerrsnr rens rrrrrnr rens rss rss rar eessueesaeeessneees 43 Events that may trigger recording sssmmssesrersrsresrrsrenrrerrrrrrrrer rer r ennen ren rn nan 44 Basic VMD Configuration mosseossessessressrsrrrsrrssrensrarr rss rss ran rr r rr r rar rn Kran ran nn 44 Configuring VMD for a Camera mistossessresresrresrrrrrrnrrrrrrrr rens rss rer rr sn rn rn ren r an 45 Basic VMD Configuration Full Screen nlmssmnssrrsrresrrrsrrsrrerrrrrrerr ers ren rr anna 46 VMD configuration USING ROIS intosressessressrssressrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rr r rn n
13. fz a ee il Address C dvms img_captured gt T Go Folders x Name e oo of SeefType Date Modified Date Picture Taken Dimensions Desktop OS Cam2 01 12 03 10 20 55 327 bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 41 720 x 576 E amp my Documents S Cam3_01 12 03_10 20 55_327 bmp 1 216 KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 41 720 x 576 My Music Cam4_01 12 03_10 20 55_327 bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 41 720 x 576 B My Pictures NN Cam2 02 12 03 13 48 00 O bmp 1 216 KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 i i Cam3_02 12 03_13 48 00_0 bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 I My Received Files a A Cam4_02 12 03_13 48 00_0 bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 El 4 My Computer I lt i Cam1 01 12 03 22 06 00 O0 bmp 1 216 KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 E Se Local Disk C N Cam4 01 12 03 22 06 00 O0 bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 cwp N Cam3 01 12 03 22 06 00 O bmp 1 216KB Bitmap Image 02 12 2003 21 45 720 x 576 C Documents and Setting E CD dvms driver O img captured security I uninstall GC dvms_old O mysql GC Program Files GC RECYCLER IC System volume Informa O WINDOWS WUTemp s Local Disc D S work on Purvis xo x Figure 10 7 Captured still images saved as bitmaps 10 6 Reviewing and Exporting Events Using the Event Review utility you can search through the recordings on your system and identify v
14. record time CONIC EL e cioaraeetetataetunide 29 IP COMBIT arenie 40 recording alarm switch snnsnnssnssssssssssssssesssenenna 34 42 allocating disks ou eee 25 26 audio visual eessen 3 CAPACI perecer 23 de allocating disks ou 26 duration asscccssansnseunedisexsnsousteosbennessacnensnniacs 23 event based w 4 22 43 54 99 max retention period seses 25 GUAY soreer EE 3 schedule er 61 SCHCOUICS orire 4 SL TA asiessstasassiassesncostiastosnbenetesnoneieaness 25 BIOlAGC OF sage ee 21 storage period nns 25 strategy ooo cece cescseecsscnsessssneensens 21 terminated by acknowledgement 60 tri 0 l 5 ee 43 recording quality PIEVIGW msosesrsrsrsresesesesrsrersesesrrrererrn rr rnrn nen 32 preview for IP camera sme 39 SEUNG e ne ee tres ia eer 30 38 recording rate system MaxIMUM ee 30 40 recording time ou ee eeesseseeeeeeseeeees 23 region of interest See ROI Remote configuration NetManager essees 5 remote configuration NetManager sssr 5 remote control ou ccc etseeeeeeteees 151 removing IP cameras Lusse 37 retention Of recordings mms 5 ROI MOOG eene AAN 121 overlap eseese 48 121 SAA D E 121 S SOWA Ea EE 124 schedule configuration eesse 61 FOCOUMGUNG exit 61 schedules recording ossssssssrsrsrsrrsrsrsrsrrsesesrrrnenrr ennen rn ann 4 screen layout oon cece ceccsceseesecneeseeeeneens 9 see product options SEQUENCE R 5 configuration eee 127 software CD DURNNGI sanacie
15. v p Security UK Limited Intelligent Video Processing Sentio Video Management System v4 4 User Guide Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Copyright 2001 2009 plettac Security UK Ltd All rights reserved All other trademarks and copyrights referred to herein are the property of their respective holders No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to take any derivative work without written permission from plettac Security UK Ltd This document is subject to change without prior notice Whilst plettac Security UK Ltd makes every effort to ensure the accuracy and reliability of the information contained in this document its employees and agents will not be responsible for any loss however arising from the use of or reliance on this information Comments and suggestions about this documentation are welcome If you wish to please send an email with the subject SENTIO Documentation to info plettac co uk Legal Notice Parts of the Sentio product are protected by Patents For details see the plettac website www plettac co uk ij 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 plettac ecurity UK Limited Table of Contents Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Tapo OF C ONIONS sann annia iii GUAGE inicien i Raidi IX PADOUE TS TT MU AL e dea earcaancdend atvieanedaodaneuasaaeessmedennsorean Ix Who shou
16. CNaANNEIS ape cpscueceecceceacsansat ntaaseen anaes 3 configuration eseese 33 CONTO e 11 610 a 10 errr 13 MDL serrer 33 148 AOUS sa EEEE 1 multi channel eeen 123 MUG aiae E 11 CANO serienn rna 34 sampling rate oo eects eee 34 volume control seeen 9 audio alerts NetAlert 0 132 audio visual datastreams SA EE A A AA 141 audio visual recording seses 3 auto focus affect on PTZ controls 39 81 B bandwidth networked servers eseese 141 bandwidth throttle oe 65 bandwith requirements NTSC systems oo 142 bi directional audio oo cece 5 configuration eee 124 CONOIS sererai RN 14 BNC video INPUTS oseese 147 building systems integration with eese 6 181 Intelligent Video Processing 182 C camera IGIMIVIING serca aN 133 configuration ecer ie disable live display uns 28 38 disable recording Le 29 40 enable live display 0 0 008 28 38 enable recording eesse 29 40 SU praetor teeta nee 9 HAMN heehee coe 28 37 record time eessen 29 recording quality oo 30 38 recording rate oo eee cece 30 camera Bl Gane ee 13 Camera patrol eseese 5 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD 4 44 camera VIEW mossesresssrsrsseresrsrsrnesesesreresesen renen nan 13 camera VIEWS muessesrsrssrsrsrsrrsesesreresesesrrrrner rn nn 11 capacity GORA Se cuscsessssnnaivancdienenpsunsisdsavanshdedaacustens 23 capture time dISplay sane ne re 16 capturing still images 0 17 CD burning
17. Cancel Apply Figure 6 9 Configuring Video Loss alarm output 2 Click in the Output State field and select the value Closed or Change of State from the drop down list The default state for normal operation when a video signal is being received is Open This means that the alarm state for Video Loss when no video signal is being received is Closed which displays the alert message on the camera display and triggers any other outputs such as audible alerts NOTE Video Loss alarms can share an alarm output channel with an external alarm but only if the two alarms are associated with the same output state Closed or Change of State If you attempt to use a different output state for an alarm output on two different cameras the following error is displayed A For each alarm output only one state can be set Selected alarm output has different state setting for other cameras 3 When you are satisfied that you have configured Video Loss alarms for your cameras click on OK to commit your changes i INFORMATION You can monitor the occurrence of Video Loss alarms using the Event Review utility described in section 10 6 Reviewing and Exporting Events on page 96 6 4 3 1 Configuring an audible alarm for Video Loss You can configure the plettac Sentio server to make an audible alarm sound if it stops receiving video input from any of the cameras configured for video loss alarms PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2
18. ST ERA EN r Motion Search C Quick Rate el Cy Eyza Advanced ROI Properties 0 10 70 100 V Motion M Shen Be EE MV Object Analysis Occlusion 26 25 E C Object Tracking C Abandoned Objects Removed Objects ROI Browse I Draw RULES Delete al If the Size check box is not selected any object that is removed from the area viewed by a camera will be marked in the search results If the size of a removed object is significant use the sliders on the Size scale to specify a minimum size a maximum size or both for objects to be detected in the ROI 1 Move the minimum size slider to adjust the green outlined area in the ROI This area represents the minimum on screen size an object must have to be significant to the search You can use this to exclude very small objects from the search 2 Move the maximum size slider to adjust the blue outlined area in the ROI This area represents the maximum on screen size an object can have to be significant You can use this to exclude large objects from the search Some objects may be temporarily obscured by objects moving in the foreground so you can configure a tol erable level of occlusion for the ROI In the Occlusion field specify the percentage of the ROI that can be occluded without being included in the search result If you specify a 90 occlusion rate as long as 10 of the ROI s permanent content remains visible it will not be included in y
19. The border returns to its normal colour and the text message disappears If an event is configured with a duration it dismisses itself if the user doesn t acknowledge it before the du ration expires If an event is configured with Until Ack as its duration it remains displayed until it is manually acknowledged If the camera associated with the VMD event is configured to modify its recording behaviour when it occurs acknowledging the event cancels this modified recording You can do this when you are certain that the event does not constitute a breach of security The plettac Sentio server logs the occurrence and acknowledgement of every Alarm that occurs with the ex ception of VMD acknowledgements See section 8 3 Monitoring the Event Log on page 68 for more infor mation 9 5 Pan Tilt Zoom Functionality NOTE To enable this feature the PTZ command line option must be configured in the start up properties of the plettac Sentio server Once this feature is enabled on the server any NetManager or NetManagerLite client that connects to that server can access the PTZ control console For further information refer to Appendix G Run Time Configuration on page 159 visiOprime Server Properties Ei x General Shortcut Compatibility Security fv visi prime Server Target type Application Target location dyms Target dyms dyvms exe Client NKBDH Archival PTZ Start in Ic dvms The plettac Sentio ser
20. a Cam Event vMD Pre Patroi capa Camera o Camera 01 Compression Quality e TE l Archive Settings W Enable archive Archive IPS Archive Quality Ass High Image adjustment Brightness DRAG Contrast 50 Preview recording Preview archive NOTE The recorded image quality will be affected by changes in compression quality while preview is active About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Apply Figure 4 3 Previewing image quality settings Saturation RR 5 To stop the preview click the inthe top right hand corner of the Preview Test window For information about the Archive Settings controls refer to section 12 8 Dynamic Re Archiving on page 133 4 11 Configuring Audio Recording Without the Multi Channel Audio product option described in section 12 2 the plettac Sentio FXL supports one channel of audio input connected directly to the system s motherboard Using the Audio tab of the Configu ration Console you can associate this audio input with one of the cameras attached to your system When the system starts up it detects the number of audio and video input channels When you open the Audio tab of the Configuration Console the number of each audio input channel is listed in the Audio Chan nel column as shown in Figure 4 4 Cameras Evert wap Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Jusers Options Suspicious cap l
21. dvms gt RegSvr32 sPlayerActiveX ocx The CLSID of the control is 82355148 E2E3 4762 8B8E 3D9B04BA90D9 The DLL files for the ActiveX control must be saved in the location pointed to by the DLLPath parameter If you do use the parameter to specify a location explicitly the control searches for the DLLs in C dvms by default When specifying a path you must use double back slashes in the path and at the end as follows C dvms F 4 Example of plettac Controls in HTML It is possible to embed one or more controls in html like this lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt sPlayer ActiveX test page lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt OBJECT ID Video Control CLASSI D CLSID 62355148 E2ZE3 4762 cCB6E 3D9B04BA90D9 HEIGHT 194 WIDTH 242 gt lt PARAM NAME Username VALUE Administrator gt lt PARAM NAME Password VALUE Administrator gt lt PARAM NAME DLLPath VALUE c dvms gt lt PARAM NAME Server VALUE MyPC gt lt PARAM NAMF Port VALUE 4560 gt lt PARAM NAMF Width VALUE 240 gt lt PARAM NAMEF Camera VALUE 4 gt lt PARAM NAMEF RGBTextR VALUE 0 gt lt PARAM NAME RGBTextG VALUB 255 gt lt PARAM NAMF RGBTextB VALUE 0 gt lt PARAM NAME ShowText VALUE TRUE gt lt PARAM NAME Show4CameraUI VALUE FALSE gt lt PARAM NAMF IPS VALUB 25 0 gt lt PARAM NAME StreamOnStartup VALUR TRUE gt lt OBJECT gt lt body gt lt html gt PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 200
22. e Low e Monochrome The effect of each archival compression algorithm on the size of archived recordings depends on the image quality of the original recordings Table A 2 shows how archival compression rates vary with different original image qualities Original Quality Quality Hon ja5 Jas7 foe Jose Jose Jari forz fara arr Jove Jago Table A 2 Compression Ratios for Each Archive Quality A 2 1 Archival File Sizes Table A 3 shows how the file sizes of typical recordings are affected by each of the three archival qualities Original Quality Original Size KB 37 25 22 17 5 14 12 5 11 9 7 8 6 T5 Archive Quality 220 210 150 130 izo roo oo Tao frs Jes Teo jr fs ran pofo fs far teo Jar Jas leo Jas 240 200 ao ze 100 Jao frs 70 Jas ssa Table A 3 File Sizes of Archived Recordings for Each Archive Quality 140 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 lettac curity UK Limited Pp Appennix B Network Bandwidth B 1 Requirements Depending on their configuration the plettac servers compress the video and audio data captured at diferent rates The amount of data the system serves to clients increases with image quality and is further incremented when an audio channel is associated with the camera The number of attached cameras and the amount and quality of audio visual recording you expect your system to perform has major implications for the network to which you attach it This appendix
23. serias 115 outputs alarM cre 148 P panic button eeseseessesersserrsrsrsrsrrsnnes 55 pan tilt Z00M oooeeeeesersrssssrsrsrssrsrsrrrrrrr er nnrnrnr nanna 6 Pan Tilt Zoom See PTZ password protection u 73 75 patrol cyclic camera display 5 patrol SEQUENCES eseese 66 PlayBack ACCESS A EAA 73 image capture uns 95 PIAyDACK secrsmironenanissicsarriaiei 4 accelarators eessen 16 G R IS saaien 16 event locators users 16 event revieW sesoonse 17 96 ODPOR secerni EE 17 image capture esseere 17 POCION serea 95 Printing peer 17 Playback console eese 15 pocket PC streaming clients nns 86 POTICO orean S ix preview archive quality oo eee 134 video quality o 32 video quality for IP camera 39 print recorded IMAGES oseese 95 PURCUUNY perenn en Pr eo 17 printing exported images 106 printing IMAGES seess 95 product OPTIONS eseese 115 arCNIVE sade csnitcen Sree sot uten 133 bi directional audio ss 124 live mode ooseeeeerersrersrsesesrsererrrrererenen ennen enn 87 multi channel audio 123 NGLAIS scinoen n nee 129 PEC ee ostens bedre 79 133 SEQUENCED masssssssrsesrsesrseserersrsrres er enen eran 127 SWEAMET soslerteeeserossnsediernindennseisnsderdsenie 83 synchronization seen 132 PTZ 610 0 10 ne 6 81 disable focus control 0 39 81 joystick Control oo 83 push button recording ss 34 42 19 March 2009 plettac FXL v4 4 R
24. time on each image Displays the capture date amp time on each image the capture date amp time on each image FDB Flush Database Deletes all records rd divers ners a eco fom he deiabase and the database and rd divers ners a eco fom he deiabase and drive Host TCP Enables the Host protocol over TCP IP port base 3 IPBox Adds the IP and Port box to the Connect dialog of the plettac GUI enabling users to connect to servers other than the ones listed in the available server list PCamera Allows the server to recognise IP cameras and enables the functionality to configure them 160 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Host COMn lt baud gt Enables external host commands on the specified COM port lt parity gt MCI u lt user gt with specified baud and parity The MCI switch changes to the p lt pass gt Dedicated Micros MCI protocol rather than the plettac command set For detailed information refer to the Remote Control Commands appendix of your plettac server user guide The optional user name and password can be specified primarily for the MCI protocol If you specify u alone the login dialog solicits a username for connections to the external host port Example Host COM1 9600 N MeL u 9ues ct P Guesec User Manual Run Time Configuration Table G 2 Me Server or Parameter Description Remote INAS Enables mapped network drives on the MultiHD tab NKBDH No KeyBoarD Hook Prevents the
25. 05 O06 OF O8 OS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 168 19 20 21 22 23 24 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 7 1 Example recording schedule PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 61 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 7 1 1 Create a Schedule To create a recording schedule use the following procedure 1 Open the Schedules tab of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 7 1 2 Click the New Schedule button A dialogue box appears prompting you to enter a name for the new schedule Enter the name for new recording sc OK Akemate_ Weekday Cancel 3 Enter a name for the new recording schedule and click the OK button A new schedule is displayed showing the grid divided into hours for each day of the week Depending on your recording requirements you can add or delete intervals or modify the details of intervals in each schedule 4 To add an interval a Select the appropriate check box for the days on which the recording is to take place Interi HoaHG H MoT wWThF 5S 5 Start End IPS Quality Alarm VM mm ari a g b Either click your left mouse button on the start time in the grid and the right mouse button on the end time or use the spinner arrows next to the Start and End displays in the Inter val panel to set the required times Interval Bes Gar saul a aise seas Start End IPS Quality Alarm VMD
26. 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording 4 From the Event Duration drop down list select a duration for the suspicious alarm All cameras associated with this alarm record for this duration whenever the alarm is triggered For more information see section 6 6 1 Termination of Suspicious alarm recording on page 58 Suspicious Alarm Input Input 05 v Input State Change of State v Event Duration 5 In the list box of Available Cameras double click the cameras from which the server should record when a suspicious alarm button is pressed The cameras you select are transferred to the Cameras to be recorded list box If you want to remove a camera from the alarm double click it s entry in the Cameras to be recorded list box to remove it from the list Suspicious Camera Selection Available Cameras Cameras to be recorded 02 Camera 02 01 Camera 01 E Camera 03 p Camera 04 Alarm Input Hone ba Each camera associated with the suspicious alarm records at the higher ips rate configured for it on either the Camera or on the Event menu If a camera has not been associated with any other event VMD or alarm it is automatically enabled for event based recording when selected for the suspicious alarm As Figure 6 13 on page 57 shows Camera 03 was already configured for use with another event but the other cameras used in the suspicious alarm configuration have their Event record
27. 35 connecting to more than one server 35 IP camera record time oeeo 40 recording rate eseese 40 F M VINO serrr 38 ips system MAX MUM ue 30 40 J JOVSTICK csciociscicscccdasescissesstcsticiesesstcstectesededessiest 83 K keyboard ON SCIECN pennorin 14 L E OUT aaa ee E EE 13 limit network utilisation 65 Limitations of archiving msn 143 live display creer 1 4 live display mode n se 77 full frame or single field 0 0 0 0 77 M methods PACUIV OA ossiseriseneniensstn sinesksneteson arne dine 156 mode SCICGCUOM gence eee 12 MPEG 4 oie cseescsecsctecsesecseeesseeesseees 1 multi channel audio eseese 123 multiple passwords ou eee eeeeeeeeeeees 73 multiplexor configuration u 169 N IAS E 1 161 recording 0 eet 26 NetAlert alarmMS oooeeeeesrsrssrsrsrsresesrsrsrerserneserreren rn rn rn 131 audio alerts nns 132 configuration eee 130 product option ou eee 129 NetManager remote configuration eesse 5 network bandwith limit oe 65 available bit rates oe 65 network drive PON TO aaan ser 92 networked servers bandwidth aese 141 networking oososmmsrsrsrsrssrsrsrsrssesrsrsrersererrrrrnrnr rena 1 5 non interlaced image nns 77 NTSC bandwith requirements u 142 183 Intelligent Video Processing 184 O object removal VIVID seers tee EE 119 object tracking SVMD sonenn nEaN NG 118 on screen keyboard oo cee eee 9 14 Optional features oo e eee 115 ONS
28. ARK r nan 89 10 2 Locating Alarm and VMD Events ccccccceecceeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeeaeeees 89 10 3 EXPORUNG RE COMGING S serseri a aE RR 90 10 3 1 Starting the Export Utility oes seeds cansseetoweendonccccucnaseecetuwd ancewaencine aa 90 10 3 2 Exporting to a hard disk drive missmessssessesserssrerreresrrrrerrererrrrrnrer rer rorrn renarna 92 10 3 3 EXPONO O CDO DYD rece stec see rceceanh E OA EES 93 10 3 4 Cancelling AN EXPO ccccccecceecesecceecceeceseceeeseeeeeseesueeeueesseesseesaees 95 10 4 Printing Images in Playback Mode mustessesesrsrrsrrsrerrsrrorrrrerrorer rer renen norr nr a 95 10 5 Capturing Images in Playback Mode ve nsssssessresrrsrresrrrrrsrrrrrr ense rr rerna nan 95 10 6 Reviewing and Exporting Events ulnnasnssmsmssserrsrrsrerresresrerrererrorrorer rer ror rna 96 10 6 1 Starting the Event Review Utility sssssssssssessressrrssrrosrensrenrrrrrrrrrrrr ren r nro rann 96 10 6 2 Selecting Event types for display osmnssssssssssessresrresrsrrrenrrsrr enn ren r ror snar rann 97 10 6 3 Displaying a summary of Events musssnnssressrssressresresrresrrer rer rrrrr rer rinner nr enn nn 98 10 6 4 Listing the recordings associated with an EVENt ssssnsssssssessesrorrsrerrrrr na 99 10 6 5 Reviewing Event related recordings cccccccseceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 100 10 6 6 Enqueueing Event related recordings for Export ccceceeeeee eee 101 10 6 7 Deleting Events from the plettac da
29. Cam Event YMD P review Patrol Capacity Sched Engin Log Au dio pairs Users Options Suspic CSD Video Motion Detection YMD Wutput Wn Display Mode Camera 03 Camera 03 Sensitivity level p Duration before alarm Learning Duration Enable ROI M VMD fe Object Tracking Abandoned Object I Object Removal Object Settings 0 gee JZE 0 Speed i clusion Direction S Delete AOI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 1 Configuring Basic VMD for a camera SVMD option installed Once you select the VMD check box of the enable area the procedure for configuring basic VMD is very sim ilar to that described in section 6 2 Basic VMD Configuration on page 44 If you want to draw ROls how ever you must also select the ROI radio button 12 1 2 VMD Menu with the SVMD product option Table 12 1 shows the additional configuration items that appear in the VMD Menu of the Configuration Con sole when the SVMD product option has been purchased and activated GUI Element Description Settings that apply to all ROIs in the current Camera View Camera Sensitivity Output on Display Provides a drop down list of cameras that have been enabled for VMD in the Cameras menu One of these camera names may have the suffix SVMD if SVMD Sliding features have been configure
30. Click the Object Removal check box in the Mode area This activates the Object Settings area Decide whether your want to apply the VMD to the whole camera view or to a portion of it Oa If you want the VMD to cover the full camera view select the ROI radio button opposite the Object Removal mode If you use full screen ROI the server must become familiar with all the background objects in the camera view Ob If you want the VMD to apply to just a part of the camera view select the ROI radio button position your mouse cursor in one corner of the area where you want an ROI and drag out the border to draw the box This enables you to focus the server s attention on one or more specific objects in the picture Figure 12 5 above shows an ROI drawn to guard against the removal of a painting in an art gallery For the plettac server to recognise when the object s that you want to guard are removed it must learn to distinguish the objects that belong permanently in the ROI from those that move through it transients In the Learning Duration field you can configure a period in seconds for the server to familiarise itself with the scene This period starts when you commit your configuration changes It is best to perform this configuration when there are no transient objects in the picture However if you specify a relatively long duration and the transient objects move before it expires the server can learn which objects are permanent and which ar
31. Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 1 4 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 4 plettac CHAPTER 12 Product Options NOTE In addition to the basic features of the plettac server there is a range of product options available that you can purchase to expand the functionality of the system Some product options require additional hard ware This chapter describes how to use the following product options e Super Video Motion Detection SVMD e Multi Channel Audio e Bi Directional Audio e Camera Sabotage Detection CSD e Video Sequencer e NetAlert e Time Synchronization e Dynamic Re Archiving SVMD and Multi Channel Audio must be ordered and purchased from your supplier Activation of some options may also require plettac support staff to visit your location and perform additional configuration 12 1 Super Video Motion Detection SVMD NOTE NOTE 7 INFORMATION If you have purchased the Super VMD SVMD product option you can configure the plettac server to apply this functionality to one camera view SVMD applies enhanced detection rules which enables the plettac server to e track the direction speed and size of objects moving in the camera view e detect whether an object has been removed e detect whether a foreign object has been deposited or abandoned This section describes how to perform the advanced configuration for your SVMD camera If the SVMD modes are disabled it means that
32. Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 2 plettac Network in Context Figure 1 1 shows how various products in the plettac range can be integrated into a sophisticated sur veillance system sie ip fies 50 ipa L M eE 4 ev up to 25 ps Gener Figure 1 1 plettac Sentio servers as part of an integrated modern CCTV system 1 3 The plettac Range of Systems Table 1 1 provides an overview of the display and recording capacities of each of the plettac Sentio servers for both the PAL and NTSC video standards J onuas Capacity Video Standard Max Video Inputs Cameras Max Audio Max Audio Inputs obe Recording Rate per Camera ips V ERIIUEN ERIEIN D ERIEIN 1Xd onuas System Max Live Display ips Alarm Inputs max Alarm Outputs max Disk Capacity GB Standard Optional Extended Disk Capacity 2 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 ene N C e ff Rate ips io iia i ili C C CEP al kl e ins ON ENN EC E T T 15 15 15 FPFEPEE User Manual plettac the complete solution for networked video Capacity J onuas wn wn O O 9 z I I Tl y m 7 x t When only a single camera is connected to the Sentio E the maximum is 25 ips on PAL systems or 30 ips on NTSC systems Can be extended to multiple TB with a raid array 1500 on 16 channel model Table 1 1 Overview of capacities of various plettac Sentio servers 1 4 Benefits
33. List and starts the Export procedure Table 10 1 Descriptions of the elements of the Export dialog PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 91 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 10 3 1 2 File naming convention for Export Each export file is named so that you can immediately identify its origins and content Figure 10 3 illustrates the file naming convention f Content Camera No Start Time Start Date End Time End Date Format 02 57 00 31 July 2008 _ 02 58 35 31 July 2008 Figure 10 3 Export File Naming Convention 10 3 2 Exporting to a hard disk drive Use the following procedure to export to a local hard drive or to a mapped network drive 1 Start the Export utility See section 10 3 1 Starting the Export utility on page 90 2 Use the Browse button to open an explorer dialog and select the Target drive The Target Capacity Indicator displays the available disk space on the selected drive 3 From the Camera drop down list select the Camera whose recordings you want to export 4 Select the start date and time for the Export The default selection is the time stamp of the frame at which Playback is stopped 5 Select the date and time of the image at which the Export should end 6 Use the check box to specify whether to include the viewer software in the Export or not This increases the size of the export by 1 5 MB and is written to the export only once 7 Use the Add Video amp Audio button or the Add
34. Meee saeeiccesie seee ect E caer ivece eunseestcenaeteeeenecnennececs 12 The Supervisor Button ccccccccecccsseeeeeeeeeeeaeceseeeeeeseeeeneeeuetsneeaees 12 Screen Layout ButtONs cece csececssceceeeeseseeseeeseaeesegeeseeeeseeesseesees 13 Camera LIS Erte sete cieeot te crear enn niarra E OEA EE NEEE EEEE 13 Master Audio CONtrOlS ssssssssessssassasrsresrasrer rr rrnrer rara r ankar ror an r ankor nr Kn Ran rann 13 On Screen Keyboard inssnossessresrrsrresrrerrrrrrerrerrrerr rer rens rr rr rr rr R Ks KKR KARA R nana 14 19 March 2009 iii Intelligent Video Processing 2 9 2 10 2 10 1 2 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 4 2 10 5 2 10 6 2 10 7 2 10 8 2 10 9 2 10 10 2 11 2 11 1 2 11 2 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 iG aed O22 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 11 4 11 1 4 11 2 4 12 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 52 1 5 2 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 4 0 0 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 plettac FXL v4 4 Message Area in Live mode ccceeccceececeeceeeeeceeeeesueeceeeeseeeeseeeesaees 14 PIAVOACK CONGO Ct sernir aE EER RA E 15 Playback Time LING os deescvc2sdpcencpteantaiddascateescisizcntennpeeatentddagncaaieusnamentoucnass 15 Capture Time DISplay ccccccceccsccceeeseeceeeceeteeesseeeseeeeessecseeeeeseeeaees 16 Playpack UO NG sssrinin EE AE EE 16 Event Locator ButtOns ccccccccceccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeees 16 Pl
35. Output Alarm State Open Test Figure l 2 Extended Settings dialog of the Panasonic KX HCN PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 165 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 3 Axis 2401 The Axis 2401 is an analogue to IP converter The unit has one analogue video input and one IP output and supports four alarm inputs and one alarm output Axis 2401 Extended Settings Alarms Input Alarm 1 Stake Closed Input Alarm 2 State Closed Input Alarm 3 State Closed Input Alarm State Closed Output Alarm State Closed Test Figure l 3 Extended Settings dialog of the Axis 2401 Select the required state for an alarm from the appropriate drop down list 4 Axis 221 The Axis 221 is an analogue to IP converter The unit has one analogue video input and one IP output and supports four alarm inputs and one alarm output Figure 1 4 Extended Settings dialog of the Axis 221 Select the required state for an alarm from the appropriate drop down list 1 5 Axis 232D The Axis 232D is an analogue to IP converter The unit has one analogue video input and one IP output and supports four alarm inputs and one alarm output Figure l 5 Extended Settings dialog of the Axis 232D Select the required state for an alarm from the appropriate drop down list 166 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 lettac ecurity UK Limited AT Appennix J AIM Integration
36. PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Live Mode Operations http lt computer name gt streamer pl where lt computer_name gt is the name assigned to the server at installation IS WARNING It is imperative that you do not change the computer name of the plettac Sentio server when you add it to your network 9 6 1 2 Streaming Rates The plettac Sentio server streams video at two rates e 195 kilobit second across fixed networks and wireless LAN e 11 kilobit second across mobile telecommunications networks 9 6 2 Connecting to a streaming plettac Sentio server To connect to a plettac Sentio server that is enabled for streaming use the following procedure 1 Open a Web browser and enter the streaming URL of the plettac Sentio server from which you want to see images The streaming URL takes the form described in section 9 6 1 1 Address for streamed video 2 Enter any Username and Password that is valid for the server to which you are connecting 3 Click the Login button 1 A dialog box appears prompting you to choose whether to run Windows media player as an inde pendent application or embedded in your web browser The example in Figure 9 11 shows the selection of the independent option the result of which can be seen in Figure 9 12 on page 86 Streaming Cameras Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt ir x B A a Search Sp Favorites GA media al A LJ Google
37. Rate C x1 Fe ee Ce x4 he We ae ae raat RES Na Advanced SS gt sE ay Aaa ROI Properties 0 20 70 100 Vv Motion SEE NG ee ESA SA IV Object Analysis C Object Tracking Abandoned Objects C Removed Objects ROI Browse Draw Delete Delete an f the Size check box is not selected abandoned objects of any size will be marked in the search results If the size of abandoned objects is significant use the sliders on the Size scale to specify a minimum size a maximum size or both for objects to be detected in the ROI PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 1 Move the minimum size slider to adjust the green outlined area in the ROI This area represents the minimum on screen size an object must have to be significant to the search You can use this to exclude very small objects from the search 2 Move the maximum size slider to adjust the blue outlined area in the ROI This area represents the maximum on screen size an object can have to be significant You can use this to exclude large objects from the search 19 March 2009 1 1 1 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 11 3 1 3 Removed Objects Removed Objects mode enables you to search for when a familiar object in the camera view is removed To search for objects that have been removed click the Removed Objects radio button in the ROI Properties panel SearchExpert Camera Sees D 71 100 05 Driveway WOKINGCCTY Sensitivity 70 E
38. SVMD events until the learning period is complete For more information see section 12 1 4 and section 12 1 5 Table 12 1 Super VMD configuration settings PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 1 7 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 12 1 3 Configuring Object Tracking SVMD 118 In some cases the mere detection of motion is not in itself significant In one day at a busy international air port thousands of people may pass a CCTV camera on their way to the departure gates However if some one having cleared Airport security attempts to return to the departures hall this represents a significant security risk In this case the direction of the motion is what makes it significant Object tracking mode VMD enables you to configure a camera to trigger VMD events when motion is detect ed in specific directions and speeds and for objects that fit a specific size range To configure a camera to use Object Tracking mode VMD use the following procedure 1 Open the VMD menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 12 2 Cam Event YMD P review Patrol Capacity Sched Engin Log Au dio eee Users Options Suspic CSD Video Motion Detection YMD Camera 103 Camera 03 SYMD v Sensitivity level p 9 Output On Display EUO i Object Settings D 30 7 Size D 100 m o 15 80 100 Object Tracking Speed E Pa Direction Sg Delete All Start Test Ab
39. Search Results window which lists all the transactions found Click on a transaction to display the information it contains arme Ret tre fret fena Prepress TRANSACTION END Crisler NOTE If you have a search result you can use the times of each of the transactions in the result as the Time Selection for an alternative search criteria by highlighting the result and clicking Use Result Times As there may be many hundreds of transactions in the first search result processing this may take a long time J 5 2 Refining transaction searches It is possible that there may be hundreds of transactions during a particular time period plettac IVMS allows you to refine your search by searching for specific information contained in the transactions record The information may be either a text string you enter in a search field or values relating to user defined pa rameters 1 14 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual ATM Integration For example you may suspect that some fraudulent transactions have been made using a particular credit card Enter the number in the Card Number field and click Search to find only those transactions pertaining to that card TRANSACTION END Search Pattern FR Card Naber The search protocol for numeric identifiers is dependent on how your ATM machine writes the relevant infor mation to the transaction record 1 If your ATM writes the identifier and value on on
40. Software mms 94 export tO siteritetanteenterctiae ene 93 write speed ooo ec esccsseteeteeteeneenes 94 CIF definitions orere 31 storage Capacity ou 31 supported resolutions 3 31 CIO GI ecsessesreprosnntdsgren sine EAS 12 commands remote oooeeeeeerererssreresrsrerrererrererner renen renen n rna 151 COMPrESSION aissius 3 audio ee 34 compression ratios ArGNIVE occ ee ecesescseeeeeeeeseeseeseeneenees 140 configuration ACCESS oeeecccccccccccscescsssssscescseeecseeeeseeseseees 73 COMSOIS ee ee ee re ee 18 remote ccssd chaveainserd ce tacasevenicgcntantaesssiacisvaneacas 5 scheduled recording c eee 61 Configuration Console nns 18 configuring ATM integration 169 05S B a ere rer rere 4 44 D data 2 lt 1 9 6 eee ee nee 26 data retention period ou ee 25 Stacked alarMs o oo 25 database events ooeeesessersresreresrsresesrerrsrenrsrere renen en 102 datastream size audio visual eese 141 detection directional movement 0 0 0 008 118 movement bismossesssrsrerssrsrerreresrsrenesrrnr neon 45 object abandoned ee 120 Object removal sesser 119 19 March 2009 plettac FXL v4 4 dial up on alarm oeer 58 disk space allocating eese 25 26 CONSErVINg ooeeereresrsrsrsresesrsrsresereresrrnen rn enn 21 N S A AE ES 26 recording strategy eseese 21 disk storage de allocating o oo 26 disk usage 16721 90 111410 serseri 21 dome camera
41. Standard CIF resolutions To change the CIF setting for a camera click on the Resolution column of the Cameras tab and select the required setting from the drop down menu Cameras Jevent VMD Preview Patrol Capacity Sched Enginee Log Audio Users Options SUSPIC BSK l e rme ie erer 5 eso fresa ans mt van eoa pa cee e ame 1 paa a e 352 x 256 half field e cean y ws 1 E FE EN EA I Min alarm canik nn En F STIRFA The CIF resolution selected during camera configuration will automatically adjust the estimated storage capacity requirements displayed on the Capacity tab The higher the resolution the greater the storage requirements and the fewer number of days that can be recorded on any given hard disk drive Performance adjustments Depending on the video capture cards installed in your plettac Sentio server there are some performance ad justments that are made when combining certain IPS Quality and Resolution values For plettac Sentio FX and FXL systems the alterations differ depending on the video capture card installed For plettac Sentio systems with MR XXXX video capture cards the maximum IPS is restricted to the equivalent of 50 2CIF fields For plettac Sentio systems with PRO4000 video capture cards the maximum IPS for remaining cameras is re duced by the number of IPS multiplied by the number of cameras set to 4CIF This is illustrated in the table below Maxi
42. Suspicious Alarm can be held ina protected stack on disk the size of which can be configured see section 3 4 Allocating Storage for Recordings on page 25 If the recording associated with an alarm is still in the protected stack an appropriately coloured stack icon is displayed beside it in the summary list Shows the time when the plettac sentio server registered the event Shows the time when the event was acknowledged Depending on configuration the server can do this automatically after a configured duration or it can be left to be acknowledged manually by a system operator The type of the event The list of cameras whose recordings are associated with the event The list of audio inputs whose recordings are associated with the event Alarm summary columns in the right hand pane of Event Review TriggerTime AckTime Type CameraList AudioList Table 10 5 10 6 4 Listing the recordings associated with an Event When you click with the left mouse button an event in the left hand pane of Event Review its details are dis played in the right hand pane A separate line is displayed in the list for each camera whose recordings are associated with the event Table 10 6 describes the columns in which the recording details are displayed Column Description The number of the camera that made the recording Camera RecStartTime The time at which the camera started recording This can precede the actual trigger t
43. UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playback Mode Operations When the export is complete a separate file is created for each entry in the Export List and the utility displays the following message Message 1 Export completed Figure 10 6 Export complete message 10 3 3 Exporting to CD or DVD The sentio Export utility automatically detects the presence of a CD or DVD writer on the machine on which it is running and if the correct software is available selects it as the default Export Target device Export supports the following CD and DVD formats e CDR e DVDR which comprises the DVD RW and DVD RW formats If you do not have a CD or DVD writer installed there is no default selection for the export target Using the Browse button you can select a hard drive as the target for the Export utility See section 10 3 2 Exporting to a hard disk drive on page 92 NOTE If you have a CD or DVD writer installed and it doesn t appear in the Target drop down list you should ensure that the correct CD DVD burning software is installed on the machine See section 10 3 3 1 Required software for export to CD or DVD During Export the burner software automatically detects whether the disk in the drive is a CD or a DVD To export to a CD or DVD use the following procedure 1 Start the Export utility See section 10 3 1 Starting the Export utility on page 90 2 Select a CD or DVD writer as the Target The Advanced Export op
44. UK Limited APPENDIX I Supported IP Cameras plettac servers support a range of IP cameras This appendix provides information on the Extended Settings for the cameras currently supported e JVC VN C30U e Panasonic KX HCM e Axis 2401 e Axis 221 e Axis 232D 4 JVC VN C30U The JVC VN C30U is a versatile network camera with a powerful CCD and built in Web server that allows you to connect it directly to your network The built in 10Base 1T 100Base TX interface gives you the high speed connection you need for reliable data transfer and operation allowing real time image delivery JVC N C30U Extended Settings Xx Image Settings Relay Alarm Input Alarm 3 I Saturation 26 Enable a Speed 1 100 C 1 60 First Alarm input Alarmi v Interval s 200 IV Auto Focus PTZ Preset On Alarm ja v m Input Alarm 1 Output Alarm PTZ Preset On Alarm 5 v Alarm State closed S SSE Test Input Alarm 2 Ss LX ALL L LCQd ___test PTZ Preset On Alarm s x Figure l 1 Extended Settings dialog of the JVC VN C30U 2 Panasonic KX HCM The Panasonic is a new network camera with a range of features including remote pan tilt Zoom focus control with optical zoom with automatic and manual focusing The KX HCN employs a 380K pixel CCD image sensor and has an integrated web server Panasonic KX HCM Extended Settings Eq Alarms Input Alarm State Closed v
45. VMO Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering tog Audio Users Optons Suspicious cso Selection Defauk New Schedule Edt Schedule chedule ea lt _ __ lt lt lt MT WThFSS Start E nd IPS rreeeeerer_ poy od prj Delete Interval New Interval a Repeat these steps until all the required information is entered for the schedule 7 2 Applying Schedules to Cameras If you have defined a recording schedule as described above you can apply that schedule to one or more cameras in the Record Time column of the Cameras tab as shown in Figure 7 3 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 63 Intelligent Video Processing on the Cameras tab Cameras Jevent VD Preview capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio PTZ Users Options Suspicious CSD E tne as OK Camera 01 On alarm switch 720 x 288 single field Camera 02 720 x 288 single field Camera 03 720 x 288 single field Camera 04 720 x 288 single field Camera 05 720 x 288 single field Camera 06 On alarm switch O coneecs Tax server Eats v 720 x 258 single field Cameras Evert ap Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio prz Users Options Suspicious cap l m rz S a A fey cameraos v Weekdey idd rr po Camerad Z Ondlamswich 1 720x2macngefe v 08 cmas
46. Video Only button to add an entry to the Export List The Target Capacity Indicator updates the display of the Export s size and of the space available 8 You can create as many additional entries for the Export list as will fit on the target drive Each time you add an entry the available space is recalculated If your addition would exceed the available space the Export utility displays the following dialog xl A Selected Record s exceed the limit of target media Selected Record Size 3144 MB Figure 10 4 Export space exceeded warning message NOTE You cannot add a duplicate entry to the list However two export entries with the same start and end times are unique if one of them includes audio and the other does not 9 When you have created entries for all the recordings you need to export click the Export button The Export utility displays its progress at the bottom right hand corner of the screen as shown in Figure 10 5 below Export takes place in 5 stages which are shown in a vertical progress bar Progress within each stage is shown in the horizontal progress bar During the first 4 stages the utility prepares the export and writes to disk in stage 5 cael Cancel Export Figure 10 5 The Export progress indicator NOTE For large export files you may notice the horizontal stages seem to be repeated This is because Export breaks large files into smaller chunks and must repeat the stage for each 92 19 March 2009 PL
47. access the Configuration Console but bars access from the other users groups Playback and Export are still accessible by all users Access Password Manager ae Standard User Administrator Protection a Ott Table 8 8 Configuration access restricted to Administrators 14 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual System Administration Tasks 8 5 4 Configuring password protection Table 8 9 shows a configuration with the Password Protection field selected for all features The Standard User and Manager fields are selected for each GUI feature This forces all users to login with their passwords to access any of the GUI features within the limits described in Table 8 5 on page 72 Access Password Manager a Standard User Administrator Protection ew POOO O Po LA O SSS Configuration Dual Authentication Table 8 9 Password access to all users for all features Table 8 10 shows a configuration with the Password Protection field selected for all features and Dual Au thentication enabled The Standard User and Manager must log in to access a feature and also have a second user a Manager or Administrator respectively to also log in to allow them access Access Password Manager Standard User Administrator Protection dein Zoo S ee Bem Configuration Dual Authentication Table 8 10 Dual authentication for to all users for all features PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 15 Intelli
48. application from disabling system keys such as Ctrl Alt and Tab which can provide access to other programs on the machine on which the application is running Very useful for remote client installations INTSC Customises interfaces for NTSC video standards RemoveableHD Enables the Removable Hard drive option Seq Enables the Sequencer Tab and adds Generic to the list of PTZ protocols SNMP Enables the server to generate alarms using the Simple S Network Management Protocol SNMP and add entries to the Trend Management Information Base MIB PortNumber TCP base port number default port is 4560 To change it to S R 443 use the parameter as follows PortNumber 443 PTZ Enables PTZ configuration and controls and transmits this S information to any remote clients that connect to it PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 161 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 162 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 lettac ecurity UK Limited frp ApPPenoix H Recordings during Summer Winter Daylight Saving Changes This appendix provides information about viewing recordings made during the Spring and Autumn change overs to and from Daylight Saving Time H 1 Moving to Daylight Saving Time In regions where daylight saving is implemented at the start of the period clocks are moved forward For example in the U K on the designated date in March the official time jumps from 02 00 to 03 00 Over
49. awas 1 rosent 100 4 _ cmas Z Always 1 paseneten 100 4 _ creer 7 we i aE cmas Aways 1 720x288 snglefemw aoda v Figure 7 3 Applying a recording schedule to a camera plettac FXL v4 4 Once a schedule has been applied to a camera the IPS Quality Resolution Fields s Alarm and VMD configurations are those specified in the schedule and are no longer configurable for the individual camera 64 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 4 plettac CHAPTER 8 System Administration Tasks The plettac Sentio server GUI enables you to perform privileged administration tasks that do not configure or modify the operations of the system but are essential for the maintenance of the system This chapter describes tasks that must be performed by a user with Administrator or Manager privileges The following can be set on any networked server using the NetManager application or connected directly to the plettac Sentio FXL machine e Network Bandwidth Limit The following can be set when connected directly to the plettac Sentio FXL machine e Monitoring the Event Log e Configuring a Patrol Sequence e Managing User Accounts 8 1 Network Bandwidth Limit Sending large amounts of video data across your network can use up all available network bandwidth and cause other networked applications to slow down This may prevent effective operation of other networked applications You can set a
50. been installed The user Administrator can create other users on the system with one of three levels of privileges e Administrator e Manager e Standard User 70 14 February 2007 VP UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual System Administration Tasks The Users tab of the Configuration Console enables you to perform the following tasks e create and delete user accounts e reset users passwords e specify which features are protected by password e specify which features are available to different user groups 8 4 1 Creating A New User Users with Administrator or Manager privileges can access the Users menu of the Configuration Console to create user accounts for other users To create a new user account use the following procedure 1 Open the Users tab of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 8 4 Cameras Cameras Event vo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio pz Users options Suspicious esp Users and Groups X Password Standard A Administrator Administrator Playback S Sol RE RI RE Dual Authentication D Standard User Covert Cameras TTT SSSSSSSSSIYYYJE ag All fred None Camera 02 Camera 03 Flip Camera 04 ij Camera 05 Update Camera 06 Camera OF Add User Remove User Change Password Camera 08 About CLOSE APPLICATION K Apply Figure 8 4 Creating a new User Account 2 Click the Add User Button to open the Add U
51. button next to the Alarm name If the current screen layout is not displaying the camera view associated with the physical alarm the occur rence of that alarm switches the screen layout automatically to the layout with the maximum number of dis play tiles If the camera associated with the alarm is configured to modify its recording behaviour when the alarm oc curs acknowledging the alarm cancels this modified recording You can do this when you are certain that the alarm does not constitute a breach of security The plettac Sentio server logs the occurrence and acknowledgement of every Alarm that occurs with the ex ception of VMD acknowledgements For more information see section 8 3 Monitoring the Event Log on page 68 9 4 Acknowledging VMD Events VMD is intended as a feature of a computer assisted surveillance system It is not a replacement for human operator but as a way of helping security personnel easily identify and record significant occurrences 78 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Live Mode Operations In Live mode the border of the camera view turns yellow when a VMD event occurs as shown in Figure 9 3 Figure 9 3 Acknowledging VMD events If security personnel are monitoring the display the VMD event draws their attention to the event enabling them to decide whether or not it represents a security risk To acknowledge an event simply click on the VMD Ack text that appears in the camera view
52. can configure a period in seconds for the server to familiarise itself with the scene This period starts when you commit your configuration changes It is best to perform this configuration when there are no transient objects in the picture However if you specify a relatively long duration and the transient objects move before it expires the server can learn which objects are permanent and which are transient 12 1 6 Modifying and deleting SVMD ROIs As it is possible to have multiple ROIs configured in the same camera view and to have a mixture of stand ard VMD ROIs and SVMD ROls on one camera it could be very confusing if all were displayed at the same time Therefore the VMD configuration menu allows only one type of ROI to be displayed at a time and for only one ROI of that type to be selected When you select a camera that already has VMD configured you do not see any of the ROIs at first When you select a mode of VMD and the corresponding ROI button the ROIs defined with that mode be come visible as clear boxes in a shaded area that covers the camera view The Delete All ROIs button be comes active which enables you to delete all the ROIs of this mode for the selected camera Figure 12 7 shows a VMD configuration for a camera view which has three Object Removal ROIs one of which is par tially overlapping another PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 121 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE 122 Th
53. configure up to 5 client connections which the server can attempt to dial up in sequence until the connection succeeds 7 INFORMATION _ This feature requires properly installed and configured modems on both the plettac Sentio server and client machines It also requires NetManager to be running on the client machines NOTE Any client machines must have the following run time parameter enabled Host TCP For further information refer to section G 1 Setting a Run Time Parameter on page 159 To enable and configure Dial up on Alarm use the following steps 1 Open the Options menu and click the Dial up on Alarm check box This enables the dial up feature and activates the Configure button Event Live Display Mode Full frame interlaced M Dial Up on Alarm Configure i l Single field non interlaced Streamer Network Bandwidth Limit Enable Limit Options Enable Streamer 58 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording 2 Click the Configure button to open the Dial Up Settings dialog shown in Figure 6 14 Options Event Live Display Mode Dial Up Settings E x DialUp on Alarm eae Local Settings Client Settings Selected Client ClientH02 v Shreame Username steamer Password fees Username Enable Streamer Line Drop PS TT E DENNA SRS ten pt Timeout sec fideo Loss Phone Number 442085556 Enable Audio Al Redial attempts after
54. error Redial attempts if line is busy PN Pea PA eee Seconds Alarm Uptions before fist redial attempt fiso T ERa Cancel S top Fi ec on Ale Figure 6 14 Configuring settings for Dial Up on Alarm 3 Specify appropriate values for the server in the following fields of the Local Settings section Field Description Enter the Username of any user configured on the Sentio server Enter the appropriate password for the Username Line Drop Timeout Specify the number of seconds after which the connection to the client should be dropped if there is no response Table 6 5 Local Settings for Dial Up Settings 4 For the chosen plettac Sentio server you can define up to 5 client connections Specify appropriate values in the following fields of the Client Settings section Description Selected Client Choose a client from the drop down list of clients available for connection When an alarm occurs the Sentio server first attempts to connect to Client 1 If this connection cannot be established after the defined re attempts the server then tries to connect to the other defined clients in sequence Username Enter a Username that is authorised for incoming connections to the remote client Note This is a Windows username not a plettac Sentio one Password Enter the appropriate password for the Username Note This is a Windows password not a Sentio one Phone Number Specify the dial up number of the remote client machine
55. following factors e the number of cameras connected to the system e the amount of disk storage available for recording e the quality of video recording e the image capture format e the quality of audio recording e the size of the protective stacks for alarm related recordings e the circumstances of the area s under surveillance public private static moving e the minimum and maximum period for which you need to retain recorded data e whether or not you will be archiving the recordings of particular cameras e any alarm signals that you can use to trigger recording 3 2 Estimating Recording Capacity Your system s disk storage is a finite resource which acts as a constraint if not on the recording itself on the length of time you can store recordings The amount of disk storage you have available and the duration for which you need to retain recordings are crucial to your system configuration PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 21 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE Sed 22 Using the Capacity tab of the Configuration Console you can perform the following tasks e calculate how your plettac Sentio server configuration would use its disk storage e test how changes to camera configurations will change disk usage e predict when recorded data will begin to be overwritten e specify the size of the protective stacks for alarm related recordings e specify a maximum retention period for recorded data
56. have configured the Patrol for continuous display you may need to wait for up to 30 second before it begins 19 March 2009 67 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 8 3 Monitoring the Event Log The plettac Sentio server keeps a record of the following types of events in its daily system log e Changes in the operational state of the system e Changes in the configuration of the system e Network connections to the system e Alarm Events connected to the system e VMD Events configured for its connected cameras Apart from providing a record of all the configuration changes on your system the log provides you with a way of analysing how frequently alarms and VMD events occur on the cameras for which they are configured 8 3 1 Viewing the Log file Use the following procedure to view the Log file 1 Click the Log tab of the Configuration Console 2 Inthe first drop down list at the bottom of the screen select the date of the log entries you want to review The current date is selected by default 3 Inthe second drop down list at the bottom of the screen select the type of log entries you want to review Table 8 2 shows the options from which you can choose Selection Description of Log Records Lists all the VMD and Alarm events that occurred in the selected day Operational Activities Lists all the Events that relate to the operation of the system itself e system startup and shutdown e network connection by
57. of the plettac Sentio Many of the problems faced by managers of CCTV systems result from the often conflicting demands made of those systems which are required to simultaneously e Record images of high quality e Store images economically e Retrieve significant images efficiently e Retain images until they are no longer needed Inevitably some trade off is required However the plettac system can help reduce the amount of com promise by addressing these requirements with the following features e High quality video recording e Powerful video compression e Audio visual recording e Pre defined Recording Schedules e Playback while recording e Improved Live display 1 4 1 High quality video recording The plettac implementation of wavelet compression allows you to configure the quality of images recorded by the Sentio FXL server on a scale from 1 to 11 where 1 is the highest quality and 11 the lowest Quality 5 is the equivalent of SVHS quality The default setting for recording quality on a Sentio server is 4 You can configure the rate at which the Sentio FXL server records images from cameras on a scale from 1 image per second ips to 25 ips You can also select to record at 4CIF full frame down to QCIF Refer to section 4 6 1 Image capture format on page 31 for explanation of CIF resolutions Depending on your particular system it may not be possible to record from all cameras at the maximum rate However
58. of your building to record constantly during normal business hours However outside business hours you may want them to automatically switch to event based recording Setting the Video Recording Quality Enabling Alarm Detection Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD 19 March 2009 21 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Cam Event vmD Pre Patrol Capa Sche Engi Log Audio sequ Users opt susp cso amm Coe om SEE mero es peson vs oy an ww e or Camera Always 25 aren eam 7 Pt2 Camerac2 Onaterm swich 25 ranxsrecacr 6256 4 ME _ pts Camas Z Ames 25 on ABBR v p08 Cameras A O awas 25 raoseun pase 4 AO _ _ 05 Cameras Z awas 25 raoseun BAS 4 Dor Camera VI awas 25 osean eaw 4 AOOO 05 Cameras Z Always 25 meon ose 4 Y P08 O Cameras Z dett 20x 258cacr NIN NNN at Camera A Aways 25 osean eaw 4 _ Red Comerai2 Always 25 aoran Bal v ee a Lo a a Eo o OO a 5 OH About CLOSE APPLICATION Apply Figure 4 1 Configuring camera operations 4 2 Customising Camera Names In the plettac Sentio FXL system each video input to your server is numbered according to the BNC connector it occupies and the video capture card to which it is connected Video capture cards are numbered from left to right and BNC connections
59. once in the sequence Operators monitoring the server in Live Mode can dismiss the Patrol by moving the mouse if they need to concentrate on a particular camera view If an Alarm occurs on any of the server s camera views the server automatically interrupts the Patrol to display the relevant camera view To configure a Patrol sequence use the following procedure 1 Open the Patrol menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 8 1 Cam Event VMD Preview Patrol capacity Sched Engin Log Audio PTZ Users Options Suspic CSD Patrol Type System Cameras Selected Cameras for Patrol Screen Setup Master Monitor Layout on Patrol 1 Camera Camera Timing Time For Each Camera Patrol Timing Start Patrol At 15 35 12 Hun patrol every 15 minutes About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Figure 8 1 The Patrol tab of the Configuration console 2 From the Patrol Type drop down list select one of the options described in Table 8 1 Te eee eee ee a Patrol Type Patrol Periodic Y System Cameras Screen Setu 01 Camera 01 3 Jee 02 Camera 02 hd aster kA eto LAnant on Patrol Patrol Type Description No Patrol The default selection This disables the Patrol sequence Patrol Defines a one time Patrol Sequence Selecting this type enables the Start Patrol at field of the Patrol Timing
60. one of them is already configured for another camera You cannot configure one of these modes on another camera without first disabling them on the current SVMD camera view Not only can you configure multiple ROIs for the SVMD camera you can configure each individual ROI with its own settings and you can have a mixture of standard VMD and SVMD ROls configured for one camera You can apply one of the SVMD modes to the default full screen ROI or to ROIs that you draw in the ROI Drawing Area You cannot mix different modes of SVMD in one camera view You can combine multiple ROIs of one mode and standard VMD ROls only For example if you define an ROI in Object Removal mode for Camera 05 you can define additional Object Removal ROIs and standard VMD ROIs but you cannot add ROIs for Object Tracking or Abandoned Object This feature must be unlocked using a software code issued by plettac support staff PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 115 Intelligent Video Processing 12 1 1 SVMD Configuration Menu If you have purchased the SVMD product option the VMD menu of the Configuration Console is different from the standard VMD menu described in section 6 2 Basic VMD Configuration on page 44 Figure 12 1 shows the additional configurable elements in the VMD menu when SVMD is enabled These are described in detail in Table 12 1 on page 117 Detailed configuration procedures are provided in subsequent sections plettac FXL v4 4
61. plettac servers can be fully integrated into security systems involving automated teller machines ATMs which enables you to capture all video activity in the vicinity of an ATM and associate it with transaction information that you define ATM integration is associated with your plettac server and SearchExpert function The integration allows you to e Display transaction data on a monitor in Live mode e Record transaction data with video images e Search data using any of your pre defined parameters ATM integration is available only as a server based feature D WARNING Before you start your plettac server you must first complete the procedures described in section J 2 Programming Your ATM and section J 3 Making ATM and Multiplexor Settings Available You must also unlock the ATM integration feature PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 167 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 J 1 Overview Hydra 04 R5483 ATM1 A SDLC VSSLPro ATM NW ng j 5 i 5 i 1 Dj 1 2 A VSSI Pro TM NW SDLC VSSI Pro ATM4 ye ATM NW A Tity me a run Figure J 1 Example installation of an ATM integration J 2 Programming Your ATM Each of ATMs to be integrated with your plettac server must first be programmed so that the ATM gener ates a unique and unchanging line to identify the start of the card use and another to identify the end of the card use The f
62. provides information on the bandwidth required by audio visual data streams that the plettac FXL receives across networks It comprises the following sections e B 1 Size of Audio Visual Data streams e B 2 Network Bandwidth for PAL Systems Size of Audio Visual Data streams The file size of one uncompressed video image is 414 720 bytes per image When recorded at quality 1 im ages are reduced to 10 of the original size Audio data is sampled at 8000 samples per second Each audio sample takes up 8 bits 1 second of uncom pressed quality 1 audio data is therefore 64 000 bits or 8000 bytes When recorded at quality 2 com pressed with the GSM codec the equivalent audio data takes up 13 000 bits or 1626 bytes Table B 1 shows how the size of the data stream captured from one camera varies at different settings of Image Quality and the incremental effect of audio visual AV recording Image Quality Compression Rate Video Image Size Uncompressed Kb 1 ips Audio Data Rate Kbps Ca C C L ea p p i Table B 1 Size of data stream with different video quality settings and audio tracks a 2 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 141 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 B 2 Network Bandwidth for PAL Systems Table B 2 shows the network bandwidth requirement of a camera making AV recordings at 10 ips and at 25 ips and also the maximum number such data streams that can be transferred across netwo
63. ran nn nn nn nn rna 65 Network Bandwidth LimMitosssnosssssssrsssrssrrerresrerresrerrrnrrr reor rrrrrr rer r enn annen rr nro nn 65 Configuring a Patrol Sequence mnmesresrrrsrrsrressrrssrrrrrrnrrrrrrrr rer r rss r arr ran 2 rann 66 Monitoring the Event Log osmesssrsrsressrsresrrrrrerrer rer rer rer r ense rr r rr rr rn rr rna renen nn 68 VISWwNO ME LOJ Nl 6 ect cscceanneaecareranennentinraatsseacceietinousbinsauieanectaossat 68 Managing User Accounts ccccecceecceeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeaes 70 Creaung A NOW USET cisocana Ei ON EE 71 Limiting the cameras a user MAY VIEW sssssmsrssesresrereerrsrerrerrorrr renen rann arr nn 72 Controlling Access to Interfaces moosoeesressressresrrrrrrsrrrnrrerr rer rss rr rr annan 13 Dual Authentication ccccccccecccecsseececcceeseecceesueeceeeeessueeasesasesenseeesaes 13 Allowing open access to a feature mssnssssssseerresrerrrsrerrenrrn rens rer rrr rer r ena nr an 14 Barring access to a particular feature smnsmmssssrssrssrrrrresrrerrrrrrrr rer ren sir r ror an 14 Configuring password protection ssmnssssssessresrrrsrrsrrerrrrrrrrr ren ris rer rr rr rn nr an 15 Live Mode Operations sssssssssrsssrssrs rn nn nn nn nn n ARR R RR RR ARR RR ARR AR 77 Live Display MOde ccccccceccceceeeceeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeseees Tf Dial up on Alarm with NetManager cccccceecseeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeees 78 Acknowledging AlarmS
64. sample Rate o fot cenam E a00 03 Camera 03 O04 Camera 04 Figure 4 4 Associating a single audio channel with a video input NOTE If you have purchased the Multi Channel Audio product option you can have up to 1 audio input channels to associate with your cameras For more information see section 12 2 Multi Channel Audio on page 123 4 11 1 Associating audio input with a Camera Without the Multi Channel Audio product option the plettac Sentio FXL has only one audio input channel Therefore you must decide with which camera s input you want to associate the audio input The plettac Sentio PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 33 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 server timestamps both the audio and video data it records from that camera so that sound and motion are synchronized in Playback mode even if video is recorded at a low ips rate To associate an audio channel with a video channel click in the Camera field next to the audio channel and select the appropriate camera from the drop down list Once the audio channel is associated with one cam era it is no longer available in the drop down list for others 4 11 2 Specifying the audio recording quality By default the plettac Sentio server samples audio input at 64 kilobits per second 8 bit samples at 8000 Hz This provides sound quality equivalent to that of an ISDN Telephone and is represented by the value 1 in the Quality field on the Aud
65. search you can either look for transaction records that contain any of them by selecting the Match Any Field radio button at the bottom of PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 175 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 the dialog window Alternatively if the transaction record must contain all the terms you should select the Match All Fields radio button ani xd tajt L204 10 38 18 TRANSACTION EIGIN ALLO 10 38 21 19 1 1703 14 11 I tA LD004 10 53 95 ReneS SST HIRO SAO HO a We saa Tw Oo i Ortsa thee Cash Sanco nm F Match Any Paid I Match Al Poids J 5 3 View recordings associated with transactions There are several ways in which you can view any recorded video images associated with transactions 1 Double click on a particular transaction in a results window This will start the play back of the recorded images for transactions starting from the transaction on which you double clicked ATM Search Results ATM2 swtst e E Ol x Start Time a 09 11 2004 09 02 36 09 11 2004 09 02 40 09 11 2004 09 02 44 09 11 2004 09 02 48 TRANSACTION BEGIN 16 10 03 11 53 RECEIPT 0050 ATM RUHAPR5L01550204 CARD NO 440647010929 09 11 2004 09 02 52 09 11 2004 09 02 56 09 11 2004 09 03 00 ACC 01082900164 TOTAL AMOUNT cAD 2772 AN 2 Right click on a transaction in a results window and select from the pop up menu ATM Search Results ATM swtst e 18 11 2004 10 36 06 18 11
66. sections e Overview of plettac FXL Server Functions e plettac Network in Context e The plettac Range of Systems e Benefits of the plettac FXL e User Interfaces 1 1 Overview of plettac Sentio Server Functions plettac s Sentio is a sophisticated system for the storage and management of digital video images cap tured by CCTV cameras plettac Sentio systems can simultaneously record playback and serve digital video data across a net work Its features which are described in more detail subsequent chapters include e Up to 16 simultaneous video and audio inputs e Powerful video compression technology e Live display rate of up to 50 ips e Video record rate of up to 25 ips per camera e Capture full frame 4CIF to QCIF e Video Motion Detection VMD and Super VMD SVMD e External alarm inputs Contacts or manual switches e Event recording VMD and Alarms e Camera sabotage detection e Network connectivity PSTN ISDN TCP IP and Bandwidth throttling e Remote system configuration and playback via NetManager software e Advanced searching of recorded images for motion events e Streaming of Live Images across a network e Controls for Pan Tilt Zoom PTZ cameras e Export of data and sPlayer to CD DVD e Archival of older data on disk e Scalability of system 4 8 12 or 16 channels e Extendable storage using NAS drives or RAID arrays e Unlimited expansion over a network PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1
67. shortcut 2 Inthe Target field in the Properties dialog type the new parameter to the end of the entries already in the field See section G 2 Run Time Parameters on page 160 for a list of parameters you may need to use You may find some parameters already configured on your system PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 159 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 following installation Do not remove or modify these entries without first contacting your plettac consultant plettac Server Properties E 2 x General Shortcut Compatibilty Security w plettac Server Target type Application Target location dyvms Target C dvms dvms exe Client NKBDH DT Start in C dvms Shortcut key None Find Target Change Icon Advanced ok cme aw Figure G 2 Setting Run Time Parameters in the Properties dialog G 2 Run Time Parameters Table G 1 lists the parameters you can configure in the Target field of the desktop shortcuts of plettac applications Table G 1 Run time Parameters for plettac Applications Table G 2 rer Server or Parameter Description Remote Archival Enables the Dynamic Re Archive utility S DeHiss n Applies one of 8 different de hiss filters to all audio output from S the plettac server n can be any digit from 0 through 7 You can specify DeHiss on its own in which case the 0 filter is used by default IDT Displays the capture date amp
68. suspicious alarm associated with an alarm input on the server s alarm blocks Depending on the hardware configuration and wiring the alarm input dedicated to the suspicious alarm can receive signals from several inputs for example push buttons or panic alarms Each of these would trigger an event based recording To configure the suspicious alarm use the following procedure PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 55 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 Open the Suspicious tab of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 6 12 Cameras Event vo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Sequencer Users Options Suspicious cso r Camera Selection Available Cameras Cameras to be recorded Camera 01 es Alarm Input None Camera 03 7 Input State Closed Md Camera 07 Event Duration 105 Camera 08 About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 12 Configuring the plettac Sentio server s Suspicious Alarm settings 2 From the Alarm Input drop down list select the alarm input you have wired for suspicious alarm input Suspicious Alarm Input Input State Event Duration 3 From the Input State drop down list select the state that corresponds with the switching on the buttons that are to trigger recording Suspicious ap Alarm Input Input 05 Input State Closed Open Event Duration Closed Change of State 56
69. the ROls that use that mode are displayed and become selectable The Delete All button beneath the ROI drawing area apply only to ROIs of the selected mode You must select the ROI radio button even when you want to use the default ROI and do not intend drawing ROIs explicitly Area in which the selected camera view is displayed and in which ROIs can be drawn and selected for modification or testing A default ROI covers the entire drawing area but is disabled once you draw one When an VMD mode is selected all ROIs with that mode are displayed as clear areas in a greyed out overlay that covers the drawing area Greyed out areas represent are outside the ROIs When you select an ROI it appears outlined in yellow Settings that apply only to objects in SVMD ROls Duration before Alarm Enabled only for ROIs in all SVMD modes A scale with sliders that define the maximum and minimum size of objects that should trigger VMD events in an object tracking ROI This enables you to configure VMD that ignores movement by objects that are smaller birds leaves or larger busses than the limits you define For more information see section 12 1 3 Configuring Object Tracking SVMD on page 118 and section 12 1 4 Configuring Object Removal SVMD on page 119 Enabled only for ROIs in Object Tracking mode A scale with sliders that define the maximum and minimum speed of objects that should trigger VMD events in an object tracking ROI
70. the current configuration of the Engineering menu However it is not recommended that you specify this maximum as the Archive time limit e If you specify a value that exceeds the maximum it is reset to the maximum or to the closest 15 minute interval e You can specify the time limit using any or the time units shown in Table 12 8 but the Configuration Console displays only two contiguous units of time This means that you can specify a time limit of 245m 2000s but it will be displayed as 4h 45m e The space between time units is optional but is inserted by the Configuration Console for display Table 12 8 shows the meanings of all symbols that can be used to express the archive time limit The same symbols are used to display the system capacity Symbol Unit of Capacity mooo i ime GA HH PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 135 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Unit of Capacity Note Units of less than 1 Day are symbolised by lowercase letters Table 12 8 Symbols used to express units of Archive Time Limit and System Capacity Archive Settings Time Before Archive f D 6H Figure 12 20 Setting the Time Limit after which recordings are to be archived i INFORMATION Ifthe total capacity of the system without archive is only 2 days there is little point in specifying a value such as 1D22h as this does not allow the Archive to reduce the on disk size of sizeable proportion of recordings unless us
71. tile quadrant mosaic 2x2 camera views of equal size e Single camera view This can also be selected by double clicking the desired camera view e Mixed Layout 1 2 quadrant size tiles on the right of the display area and 8 small tiles on the left e Mixed Layout 2 1 quadrant size tile in the centre of the display area surrounded by 12 small tiles NOTE You can drag and drop camera views into different tiles in any of the tiled layouts If you select screen layout that has more camera view tiles than the number of connected cameras No Input is displayed in the unused tiles 2 6 Camera List Shows the cameras that are connected to the system and displays their names You can drag and drop camera names from this list into any of the tiles in the display area The colour of the bullet opposite the camera name indicates the status of the camera as follows Bullet Camera Status Red Active but with an Alarm condition NOTE To change the names of any cameras in this list you must use the Configuration interface 2 1 Master Audio Controls In the bottom right hand corner of the main screen are the Master Audio Controls You can use these to adjust the audio settings Volume and Mute for all audio output in Live or Playback mode Drag the vertical slide up and down to adjust the volume of audio output The speaker and slider are mauve when audio output is enabled Click on the Speaker icon to mute all audio output from the
72. which you can use to add or remove hard disk storage for your system s recordings Exercise great caution using the Engineering menu Removing storage locations can make it impossible to playback previously recorded images The plettac Sentio server detects all of the machines local hard disks and lists them in the Available Hard Disks box It lists the hard drives that are already allocated for recording in the Hard Disks to Record box Cameras Event WMD Preview capacity Schedules Engineering Jos Audio Users Options Suspicious Hard Disk Usage Available Hard Disks Hard Disks To Record About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 3 4 Adding and removing hard disks for storing recordings You can monitor the effects of the disks you add and remove using the Capacity menu as described in Cal culating recording capacity on page 23 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 25 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 3 4 1 Allocating a hard disk for recording To allocate a hard disk for storage of recordings double click one or more entries in the Available Hard Disks box This moves its entry to the Disks to Record box IS WARNING It is not advisable to allocate the C drive for storage of video recording Storing video data to the C drive would adversely affect the system s performance 3 4 2 Allocating a network drive for recording In addition to the local disks on your s
73. you can configure your system to make maximum use of its cameras within the limits of its maxi mum ips 1 4 2 Powerful video compression While capturing and recording video data plettac systems use powerful wavelet technology to com press images with minimal loss in quality This enables you to store more video data on disk and enables the plettac Sentio FXL server to scale images when serving them across a network with limited bandwidth 1 4 3 Audio visual recording All plettac Sentio servers are capable of receiving at least 1 channel of audio input via the system s sound card If you have purchased the Multi Channel Audio MCA product option together with appropriate microphones and audio alarm cards you can extend your system s audio inputs to record an audio track for each CCTV PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 3 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 4 4 1 4 5 1 4 6 1 4 7 1 4 8 1 4 9 camera you have connected This enables audio visual recording with full lip synchronization A range of au dio filters can be applied in playback to reduce hiss and so improve the evidential value of recordings For information about how to configure audio recording see section 4 11 Configuring Audio Recording on page 33 For more information refer to section 12 2 Multi Channel Audio on page 123 Video Motion Detection VMD and SVMD Using the VMD feature you can configure the
74. 009 53 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 To enable the audible Alarm open the Options menu and click the Enable Audio Alarm on Video Loss check box as shown in Figure 6 10 Options Video Loss Vv Enable Audio Alarm on Video Loss Figure 6 10 Enabling an audible alarm in the event of video loss 6 5 Configuring Event Based Recording i INFORMATION 54 You can configure the plettac Sentio server to modify its recording behaviour whenever an event VMD or Alarm occurs In the basic Camera configuration you can specify that the server records from a particular camera at a low rate such as 1 ips or not at all 0 ips under normal circumstances However on the Event menu you can specify that the server record at a better quality and at higher rate whenever an Alarm or VMD event occurs Recording that is triggered by the occurrence of events is known as event based record ing It is not mandatory that you configure events to modify the system s recording You can configure your server to record at the same rate and quality in normal conditions and when events occur However one of the chief benefits of this feature is that it enables you to greatly reduce the amount of data recorded The following procedure describes how to configure event based recording when you have already config ured VMD and alarms for the cameras attached to the plettac Sentio server 1 On the Event menu click in the Event IPS a
75. 141 B 1 Size of Audio Visual Data streams cccceccceeccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaneeees 141 B 2 Network Bandwidth for NTSC Systems monosessrsssessessrsrrerrorerrrer ren rer nen rna 142 Appendix C Archiving Guidelines s sssssssssssssssrsssrs rs rs rsrrs nn nn rn nr ARR RAR ARR KARA RAR 143 C A Archiving on the plettac range smosssssssressrsrrerrrsrrsrrorrerrerrenr innen rer r enn rann 143 C 1 1 DISHAC Senio E seseris aae EUNE E tee LA 143 C 1 2 DIC TAG EE E E A E E E A E T E E 143 C 1 3 Plettac SENtiO FX oosossossssrssessresrerroreesrerrerrer rer r er rrr ran rs ran R KRA KKR KRKA OR KORR a 143 C 1 4 DICT AC SENOS KL ace sisiceaecaneieiwtardactaceieweenssanaw Sa NN NR 144 C 1 5 Dlettac SENtiO PXL cece cecccsecceeecsecteeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneetseeeeeees 144 Appendix D Video Audio and Alarm Inputs unsssmssssmssssssssssssarssrsrra sann rn r nn nana 147 D 1 VIGGO DUNS soceyeltloss rsolslonioliortsutsretitesslottorti t ks seloot ONS ON NONE 147 D 2 AUCI MDU oh ee ne ne eee 148 D 3 Alarm INpUts amp OUfPUlS save tateitesssadedantutehbtorstioatorvnsosiaocunnenteeuetaeen 148 Appendix E Remote Control CommandsS ssssssssssssssrssrrsrrarnnnnnnn nn nn nn n gt 151 E 1 FREIMOLS COMMMANGS serrera a EEA ONE 151 E 2 PECO TZ CAG a se capsicceecaceda cutee side ENS 152 MCI Emulation COMMAS ccccccsseeeeeece cece ceeeeeeneeeseeaneeeeeeseeees 152 Appendix F plettac ActiveX Control s s
76. 2 5 1 Configuring the Sequencer To configure a video sequence for your spot monitors use the following procedure PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 127 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 Open the Sequencer menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 12 13 Cameras Event vo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Sequencer Juses Options Suspicious csp iI COM3 Configure Port ij Display List Monitor 1 Remove None About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 13 Configuring a display sequence for a composite monitor 2 From the drop down list select a serial port Your system s hardware configuration determines which ports are available NOTE When the Sequencer card is installed the USB connection is usually assigned to port COM3 Ensure that the port entered in the plettac server Configuration console matches that in your computer s Device Manager 3 Click the Configure Port button The port configuration dialog appears as shown in Figure 12 14 Port Settings Bits per second o o Data bits je sf Parity None Stop bits Roo w Flow control Noe I Figure 12 14 Port configuration for the Sequencer 4 From the drop down list select the monitor for which you want to configure a display sequence 5 Click Add to add a camera view to the display sequence A new row appears in the Di
77. 2004 10 36 09 6 11 2004 10 37 48 18 11 2004 10 37 51 TRANSACTION BEGIN 19 11 03 14 41 Play Selected 18 11 2004 11 18 01 Play All SA 18 11 2004 11 18 04 Remove Selected 4220 Remove All select Play from Selected to play recordings starting from the first selected transaction select Play All to play all recorded video data starting from the first transaction in the list Even transactions which are not highlighted will be played NOTE You can also remove all or any selected transactions from the list using the alternative pop up menu items select Removed Selected to remove all selected transaction records select Remove All to remove all transaction 3 Right click on an entry in the list displayed in the Results panel of the ATM Transaction Search tab From the pop up menu Motion Search ATM Transaction Search ATM JaTMjswtst e X Results Time Selection Name Start Time end Time Progress Date Time ResultQ wi 2004 15 01 00 18 11 2004 15 01 00 100 pd Delete sella stat 18 10 2004 gt 15 01 Delete all End 18 11 2004 15 01 NOTE You can also delete all or any selected search results from the list using the alternative pop up menu items If you have previously displayed the transactions by double clicking on a search result name deleting the search result name does not remove the transactions from the ATM Search Results window 19 March 2009 176 PL
78. 21 37 05 Dec03 14 21 36 05 Dec03 14 05 38 05 Dec03 14 05 24 05 Dec03 14 05 24 05 Dec03 13 51 57 05 Dec03 13 51 47 NS Derna 13 51 47 05 Dec03 17 51 42 05 Dec03 16 17 28 05 Dec03 16 17 23 05 Dec03 16 17 23 05 Dec03 16 17 19 05 DecOS 16 17 19 05 DecOS 16 14 46 05 DecO3 16 14 26 05 DecOS 16 14 25 05 DecOS 16 14 23 05 DecOS 16 14 23 05 DecO3 15 13 29 05 DecO3 15 13 29 05 DecO3 14 29 04 05 DecO3 14 29 04 05 DecO3 14 21 43 05 DecO3 14 21 43 05 DecO3 14 21 39 05 DecO3 14 21 39 05 DecO3 14 05 48 05 DecO3 14 05 26 05 Dec03 14 05 26 05 Dec03 13 52 07 05 Dec03 13 51 53 NS Derna 13 51 53 Suspicious Alarm Suspicious Alarm Alarm Alarm video Loss video Loss Suspicious Alarm Alarm Alarm video Loss video Loss video Loss video Loss video Loss YMD YMD YMD video Loss video Loss Suspicious Alarm video Loss video Loss Suspicious Alarm Alarm Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 16 3 4 6 14 1 16 3 4 6 14 6 14 6 3 3 3 14 6 1 16 6 Summary of all events displayed in right hand pane of Event Review Table 10 5 describes the columns in which the alarm summaries are displayed Column Description AlarmInput For events of type Alarm or Suspicious Alarm this column shows the number of the alarm input that triggered the event For events of type VMD or Video Loss this column shows the number the camera that triggered the event The most recent events of type Alarm and
79. 4 4 03 User Manual Searching Recorded Images 1 Move the minimum speed slider and a bright green line appears in the bottom left hand corner of the SearchExpert screen The length of this line represents the distance an object would need to travel on the screen in one second to be shown in the search results 2 Move the maximum speed slider and a blue line also appears in the bottom left hand corner of the SearchExpert screen The length of this line represents the maximum distance an object can travel on the screen in one second and still be shown in the search results If the direction of moving objects is significant use the Direction indicator to define the trigger direction s Initially all directions are selected so movement in any direction will be found Click on the circle and move the mouse pointer to select particular directions Multiple selections can be made to define precise directions of movement If the Direction check box is unselected SearchExpert will find movement in any direction 11 3 1 2 Abandoned Objects Abandoned Objects mode enables you to search for where an object of a particular size appears in the cam era view To configure your search for objects that have appeared click the Abandoned Objects radio but ton in the ROI Properties panel amp SearchExpert Camera gt SA 05 Driveway WOKINGCCTY Senstniey i 7o gue eS SR mo Iana ng de ee Ria CEN Paik y pa imha T soos a Quick
80. 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 7 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 2 10 10 SearchExpert Button This button opens the SearchExpert control panel which allows you to search all recorded images for partic ular motion events For more detailed information see Chapter 11 Searching Recorded Images on page 131 2 11 Configuration Console The Configuration interface of the plettac Sentio server consists of a series of tabbed menus that you can use to configure the operations of the plettac Sentio server Use the Supervisor button in the menu area of the main screen to access the Configuration Console When you click on the Supervisor button a Login dialog opens if password protection is enabled When you successfully enter your Username and Password the Configuration Console opens as shown in Figure 2 5 Cam Event vmD Pre Patrol Capa Sche Engi Log Audio Sequ Users Ont Susp CSD ATM 01 Camera 01 Enable Live P Always 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 02 On alarm switch 25 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 03 Always 25 1 Es 352 x 288 CIF S 4 1 56 Camera 04 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 05 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 06 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25 Camera 07 Always 25 720 x 576 4CIF 6 25
81. 53 Suspicious uy g 0S Dec03 16 17 18 05 Dec03 16 17 28 Suspicious Alarm 1 16 08 Dec 15 40 53 Alarm A AEA V 10 05 Dec03 16 17 18 05 Dec03 16 17 25 Alarm 3 Figure 10 11 Simultaneous review of all recordings associated with an Event 10 6 5 2 Reviewing a specific camera s recording of an Event When you click on an alarm in the left hand pane the Event Review utility lists its associated cameras on the right If you right click on a camera number you can choose the action Review EEP EventDiscription vee g 09 08 Dec 17 09 33 Suspicious 4 0S DecOs 14 55 22 0S Dec03 14 58 24 08 Deca 14 58 22 cof 10 08 Dec 17 09 33 Alarm je Review a amp il 08 Dec 17 09 33 Alarm Enqueve for Export i en 2 09 05 Dec 15 58 22 Suspicious eff 10 08 Dec 15 58 22 Alarm oof 11 08 Dec 15 56 22 Alarm von 2 O09 05 Dec 15 40 53 Suspicious 100 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playback Mode Operations Figure 10 12 As with selections made from the summary list Playback starts at the trigger time of the event but it uses a full screen layout because only one camera view is selected Another advantage of this method is that you Review of a single camera s recording of an event can see from the recording details whether a Pre Event period has been recorded or not 10 6 6 Enqueueing Event related recordings for Export In the same way as you select recordings for review you can select them for export Using the r
82. 7 Empty Iv Live JV Alarm Enable Preview 29 Empty 30 Empty 31 Empty 32 Empty Add Remove About CLOSE APPLICATION Figure 5 1 An example IP Cameras tab of the Configuring console You must click either OK or Apply to retain the information about the added cameras or save any changes to the settings of an IP camera 5 2 Adding IP Cameras To add an IP camera to your plettac Sentio server click the Add button on the IP Cameras tab to open the IP Camera Setup dialog box illustrated in Figure 5 2 Add IP Cameras Eq Search Criteria Camera Type All Time Out secs 2 C Port Jo Search IP Address All r Cameras Found MAC Address IP Address Camera Name Password Camera Slot fis Empty v Add Selected Figure 5 2 The Add IP Camera dialog box If Known select the brand of camera from the Camera Type drop down menu If you choose All from the Camera Type selections you must also select All for the IP Address If you select a particular type of camera you may search for information about that camera either at a specific IP Address or All IP addresses NOTE If you enter a specific IP Address you must select a specific type of camera 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 36 User Manual NOTE 5 2 1 NOTE IP Camera Configuration To locate any IP cameras the plettac Sentio server polls the network and recor
83. 9 157 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 58 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 amp plettac Appennix G Run Time Configuration This appendix provides information about the run time parameters that can be configured on the plettac server NetManager and NetManagerLite programs to modify their operations It comprises the following sec tions e G 1 Setting a Run Time Parameter e G2 Run Time Parameters NOTE If you find parameters already configured on your system following installation do not remove or modify these entries without first contacting the plettac support team or your plettac consultant G 1 Setting a Run Time Parameter There are a number of run time parameters that you can configure in shortcuts to the following plettac applications via the Windows desktop e plettac server e NetManager e NetManagerLite When you start the applications using these shortcuts their behaviour is modified according to the parame ters you have added To set a run time parameter to a plettac application use the following procedure 1 Locate the shortcut to the application on your desktop and right click on it as shown in Figure G 1 select properties and release the mouse button The Properties dialog opens BF open senti Run a5 Scan for viruses Pin to Start menu Send To b Cut Copy Paste Create Shortcut Delete Figure G 1 Opening the Properties dialog of the application
84. 9 17701703 Server Count 0 Configure NetAlert Server Information Server Name Status Last Check Start Time Version Restarts Figure 12 15 The NetAlert Status Dialog NOTE NetAlert always displays dates in ISO format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss rather than the local format 2 Click on the Configure NetAlert button NetAlert Configuration Server Selection Available RIDOUT Add Selected gt Remove Selected Add All gt Remove All Server Check Properties Server check period ao min fio ming Warnings in Server Failure Iv Visual warning Iv Audio warning Figure 12 16 NetAlert Configuration dialog Extensive check period Field Description Server Selection panel Available Servers Select the server s you wish to monitor in the left hand panel 130 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options Field Description Add Selected Click this button to move the selected server names to the Selected Servers list Add All Click this button to move all the server names to the Selected Servers list Selected Servers Select those server names that you no longer require to be monitored by NetAlert Remove Selected Click this button to move the selected server names to the Available Servers list Remove All Click this button to move all the server names to the Available Servers list Server Check Properties panel Server Check Period Specify
85. 9 March 2009 155 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 F 2 Properties and Methods for Activex F 2 1 plettac sentiO properties Table F 1 lists the Properties you can include in ActiveX containers to display video data I Name Type Description Default 240 1 Width Integer Video image width in pixels fixed aspect ratio determines height ShowText BOOL Show camera name time IPS on screen TRUE Shows a simple Ul with Cam 1 Cam 4 buttons on it add 25 to object height to see it ROBTeXR itger Toteniourredcanponens 255 oo Roetes Integer Text colour Bue component 0258 foo TYou can only use the IPS parameter to reduce the display rate of the video stream You cannot increase the ips rate because the upper limit is determined by the server s configured capture rate for that video channel Table F 1 Properties for ActiveX Video Display F 2 2 plettac sentiO methods Table F 2 lists the Methods you can include in ActiveX containers to display video data Method Function Table F 2 Methods for ActiveX Video Display 1 56 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual plettac ActiveX Control F 3 ActiveX Installation The files are provided in the directory extras sPlayerActivexX Copy all the files to a folder on your PC for example c dvms To register the control open a DOS session change to the directory to which you ve copied the files and run the following command C
86. APPLICATION OK Apply Figure 12 21 Selecting Archive schemes for different types of recording 136 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options The archive schemes you select for each type of recording combined with other factors cameras archive location archive time limit affect the value displayed in the Capacity including archival field at the bottom of the Archive Settings area i INFORMATION Depending on your overall storage resources it is worth considering which types of recordings are most important If you think that recordings triggered by suspicious alarms are likely to be more significant than those triggered by VMD you may choose to archive the VMD recordings with severe compression and retain or use less compression on Suspicious Alarm recordings PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 137 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 138 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 yp lettac ecurity UK Limited APPENDIX A Compression and Archival A 1 NOTE Ratios This appendix provides information on the compression rates that plettac F XL applies to the video data it stores on disk It comprises the following sections e A 1 PAL Image Quality and File Sizes e A 2 Archival Compression Ratios PAL Image Quality and File Sizes The file size of one uncompressed video image is 414 720 bytes When recorded at image quality 1 this is compressed
87. Closed Closed Input 05 Closed Closed Input 06 Closed Closed Closed Closed I I I I About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 6 Associating an Alarm Input with a camera 2 From the drop down list select the alarm input port appropriate for that camera For example if the alarm is triggered by a car park barrier you might associate it with a camera that covers the car park entrance or exit PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 49 Intelligent Video Processing NOTE NOTE 50 plettac FXL v4 4 3 Click in the Input State field of the same camera Event Camera Event Event Event Pre Event Alarm Input Alarm Video Loss Video Loss Output Name IPS Quality Duration Duration Input State Output Output Duration State 01 Camera 01 1 4 55 53 Input 04 Mone Mone 52 Closed 02 Camera 02 1 4 5s 102 Mone Mone Mone 10s Closed 03 Camera 03 1 4 10 5s Mone Closed Mone Mone 5s Closed 04 Camera 04 1 4 5s 5s Mone Er None None 5s Closed From the drop down list choose one of the following values Value Effect Closed The initial setting configures the server to trigger an alarm when the input alarm circuit is closed Open Configures the server to trigger an alarm when the input alarm circuit is Open Change of State Configures the server to trigger an alarm whenever th
88. Component Description Click these buttons to commence playback at normal speed Audio is available only when playing in the forward direction Click and hold down these buttons to fast forward or review the recorded video Images are displayed at 8 times the playback speed set by the Speed buttons on the left Once you release the button the Playback speed reverts to the speed set by the speed buttons While you are using these buttons the audio track associated with the video data is not played Click this button to advance or reverse the display one frame at a time Once the next frame is displayed Playback is paused While you are using this button the audio track associated with the video data is not played Table 2 3 The Playback buttons 2 10 4 Event Locator Buttons The buttons labelled Events to the left of the time line display enable you to skip forwards or backwards through your recordings from event to event Click once to skip to the next event Alternatively use the Event Review Utility to navigate to events in Playback using specific event types or their associated cam eras See section 2 10 6 2 10 5 Playback Speed Buttons The buttons labelled Speed below the Event buttons enable you to accelerate the Playback speed to 2 4 or 8 times normal speed To set the speed back to the normal speed click the x1 button If you are using an accelerated Playback speed and then use the FastForward or Rewind buttons the sp
89. Configuring Alarm Output 2 Click in the Output State field of the alarmed camera 0 tt EE Camera Event Event Event Pre Event Alarm Input Alarm Video Loss Video Los Output Hame IPS Quality Duration Duration Input State Output Output Duration State 01 Camera 01 3 11 20 im Input O2 Closed Mone Output 01 im Closed 02 Camera 02 3 11 52 10s Mone Closed Mone Mone 52 Open 03 Camera 03 3 11 10s a 10 Mone Closed Mone Mone 10 10a Mone Closed Mone Mone 53 Change of State Choose one of the following values from the drop down list 04 Camera 04 11 un ea Effect Closed The initial setting Configures the server to output an alarm when the input circuit changes to the alarmed state closed Open Configures the server to output an alarm when the input circuit changes to the alarmed state Change of State Configures the server to output an alarm whenever the input circuit changes state The meaning of Open or Closed depends on the physical wiring or your alarm circuits and alarm blocks Table 6 4 Output state settings for external alarms NOTE You are able to associate the same alarm output with more than one camera but the Output State must be the same for all cameras If different output states are selected the message shown below will be displayed A For each alarm output only one state can be set Selected alarm output has different state setting for other cameras 6 4 3 Configuri
90. D event in this ROI Ob As you drag the maximum speed slider to the left a blue line also advances from the bot tom left hand corner of the ROI Drawing Area The length of this line represents the maxi mum distance an object can travel on the screen in one second and still trigger a VMD event in this ROI NOTE It is not possible to track very fast objects if the capture rate of your cameras is low The recommended capture rate for object tracking is 5 ips 8 9 Click the Start Test button to test the performance of the ROI Figure 12 4 on page 119 shows the test of an Object Tracking ROI In test mode the server outlines with a coloured border each object moving in the camera view that matches the specified direction size and speed The server uses a different colour for each new object It also marks a trail showing the path taken by the object in the trigger direction HE VMD Test x Figure 12 4 Testing an Object Tracking ROI When you are satisfied that the configuration triggers VMD events for movement in the defined direction in which you are interested click on OK to commit your changes You may then draw additional ROIs in the camera to cover all significant areas of the camera view If you have defined a region of interest tracking motion from right to left in one part of the camera view you can define others that trigger events for motion in different directions in other parts of the camera view or even overla
91. E 4 6 2 Analogue Camera Configuration To set the quality at which you wish to record from a camera click in the Quality field and use the spinner arrows on the right hand side to select a quality setting from 1 to 11 where 1 represents the highest quality and 11 the lowest Quality 5 is approximately equivalent to SVHS quality The default quality setting for each camera is 4 The lower the value you specify the higher the quality of the images recorded by the camera and the more disk space they require You can save on disk space by setting a high value lower quality for the quality of constant recording and use event based recording to record at a higher quality when an event occurs See section 6 5 Configuring Event Based Recording on page 54 for more information If you want to compare different settings of recording quality use the Preview feature described in section 4 10 Previewing Video Quality on page 32 Image capture format The plettac Sentio server software can capture images at the common intermediate format CIF resolutions shown in Table 4 2 The resolution refers to the dimensions of the retained image in pixels and indicates the amount of information stored for a particular CIF Format Field Resolution PAL Resolution NTSC 4Clte Full frame interlaced 720 x 576 720 x 480 2CIF Single field 720 x 288 720 x 240 Half field 352 x 288 352 x 240 QCIF Eighth field 176 x 144 176 x 120 Table 4 2
92. Figure 10 1 The Playback Time Line amp Event Locator Buttons The Event Review utility enables you to use event types to select event related recordings in Playback based on the following event types Alarm VMD Suspicious Alarm Camera Sabotage Detection Video Loss Alarm PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 89 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 IS WARNING For more information on the above see section 10 6 Reviewing and Exporting Events on page 96 Selecting recordings for playback that are too close to the current time diminishes the quality of video and audio reproduction To guarantee proper video reproduction start playback at least 5 seconds before the current time To guarantee proper audio and video reproduction allow a 10 second lag before starting Playback 10 3 Exporting Recordings The plettac sentio server provides you with a means of transferring audio visual recordings from your system s hard drive s to the following types of external storage media e Local Hard Drives e CDR e DVDR The latter two options are particularly useful for the transport and display of evidence to legal authorities The sentio Export utility can include the sPlayer software with the data so that it can be played on any PC system running Windows 98 or later This section describes how to use the Export utility 10 3 1 Starting the Export utility NOTE 90 Before exporting any data fro
93. K to commit any changes you make to the Advanced Options This updates the Target Capacity Indicator in accordance with the changes made 5 Select the Camera whose recordings you want to Export from the drop down list 6 Select the start date and time for the Export The default selection is the time stamp of the frame at which Playback is stopped 7 Select the date and time of the image at which the Export should end 8 Use the check box to specify whether to include the viewer software in the Export or not 9 Use the Add Video amp Audio button or the Add Video Only button to add an entry to the Export List The Target Capacity Indicator updates the display of the Export s size and of the space available 10 You can create as many additional entries for the Export list as will fit on the media Each time you add an entry the available space is recalculated You cannot add a duplicate entry to the list However exports with the same start and end time are unique if one of them includes audio and the other does not 11 When you have created entries for all the recordings you need to export click the Export button The Export utility checks that a CD or DVD is present in the drive and verifies that it has enough writeable space for the export It also checks that it has enough free temporary storage on the local hard drives for the burning process Some CD DVD writer drives auto eject while erasing or verifying data during the burn proce
94. MATION Capacity Including Archive is an approximate figure and is based on an assumption that 25 of recordings are associated with VMD If all or indeed none of the recording on your system is triggered by VMD this figure is likely to be inaccurate 12 8 3 1 Archive parameters that affect system capacity Total system capacity is a factor of disk storage the number of cameras inputs being recorded the fre quency of events that trigger recording and the data retention period if specified 1 34 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options System capacity can be extended by the Archive utility but this varies with a number of different parameters Table 12 7 shows Archive parameters that in combination with each other and the frequency of events on the system can affect system capacity Archive Parameter Effect on System Capacity No of Archiving Cameras The more cameras for which Archive is enabled the greater is the potential for saving disk space Archive Quality IPS Rate The archive quality and IPS rates specified the recordings of each camera determines the size of the datastream to be archived Event Types for Archive Depending on the frequency of certain events on the system the choice of recordings to be archived based on associated event types is significant in determining how much data is to be archived from all cameras Archive Schemes Applied Archiving or discarding recordings associated wit
95. OSE APPLICATION Button Pressed in Configuration Menu YMD Alarm on camera 1 YMD Alarm on camera 6 User Administrator logged in YMD Alarm on camera 11 YMD Alarm on camera 1 YMD Alarm on camera 5 YMD Alarm on camera 6 User Login Prompted Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye Cameras on the screen changed Camera 11 is displayed in 1 camera display mode Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye YMD Alarm on camera 6 YMD Alarm on camera 11 YMD Alarm on camera 6 Cameras on the screen changed Camera 6 is displayed in 1 camera display mode YMD Alarm on camera 3 YMD Alarm on camera 2 Print 06 08 2003 2003 08 06 15 07 24 2003 08 06 15 07 24 2003 08 06 15 07 16 2003 08 06 15 07 14 2003 08 06 15 07 13 2003 08 06 15 07 12 2003 08 06 15 07 12 2003 08 06 15 07 11 2003 08 06 15 07 10 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 07 08 2003 08 06 15 07 07 2003 08 06 15 07 06 2003 08 06 15 07 05 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 06 59 2003 08 06 15 06 59 2003 08 06 15 06 53 2003 08 06 15 06 54 2003 08 06 15 06 54 nd A Display All z Events Operational Activities Configuration Activities Display All Full System Log sorted in descending order of date and time About CLOSE APPLICATION Figure 8 2 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 69 Intelligent Video Proce
96. Options 12 1 7 SVMD in Live Mode If you have clicked the Output on Display check box in the SVMD configuration objects that trigger SVMD events are highlighted in live display as shown in Figure 12 8 This highlighting is displayed only on the plettac server s console NetManager connections display only the yellow frame and VMD Ack message IDE Figure 12 8 SVMD Output on Live Display of plettac Server s GUI 12 2 Multi Channel Audio If you have purchased the Multi Channel Audio feature your plettac server can accept 4 audio inputs for each audio alarm card fitted at the back of the server This means that you can record an audio track with several or even all of the video inputs to your system i INFORMATION This feature must be unlocked using a software code issued by plettac support staff The connection of audio inputs is described in the plettac FXL 4 4 Quick Start Guide and in the plettac FXL Installation Guide Once the inputs are connected use the Audio menu of the Configuration Console to associate audio and video inputs The only difference is the number of audio inputs available Figure 12 9 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 123 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 shows the association between cameras and multiple audio inputs on a plettac server with 16 video and 1 audio inputs Cameras Event vMD Preview Patrol Capacity Sched Enginee Log Audio lprz
97. Sentio server to perform the following functions e modify its recording behaviour whenever the Event occurs e automatically dial up NetManager clients whenever an alarm Event occurs e write an entry for that Event in the system s Event log see Chapter 8 on page 65 e highlight each occurrence of the Event in Live Mode see Chapter 9 on page 77 e highlight each occurrence of the Event in Playback Mode see Chapter 10 on page 89 This chapter is concerned with the first two tasks in this list It is not mandatory that you modify recording behaviour for the occurrence of an event Even if you don t modify recording the system still highlights the events in Live and Playback modes PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 43 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 6 1 1 Events that may trigger recording You can configure the plettac Sentio server to automatically modify its recording behaviour when a specific event occurs Table 6 1 shows the events you can use to trigger recording Description The Sentio server can accept inputs from external alarm systems via cables connected to ports at the back of its casing Examples of an alarm event could be the opening of a door the raising of a car park barrier or the operation of a turnstile You can associate an Alarm Input with one or more cameras so that the same alarm can trigger recording from several cameras simultaneously though each with its individually configured ips
98. TAS my gt a z S S uaa tet Fe cl Motion Search TN E a J RAAN oh E T i iin AA C Quick Rate x1 FZ x4 a Se E SRA Advanced ROI Properties 0 50 90 100 IV Motion V Size elles ee IV Object Analysis 0 30 75 100 Object Tracking IV Speed tees aos lL l ROI C Abandoned Objects C Removed Objects ees If the Size check box is not selected any object that appears to move between images will be marked in the search results If the size of moving objects is significant use the sliders on the Size scale to specify a min imum size a maximum size or both for objects to be detected in the ROI 1 Move the minimum size slider to adjust the green outlined area in the ROI This area represents the minimum on screen size an object must have to be significant to the search You can use this to exclude very small objects from the search 2 Move the maximum size slider to adjust the blue outlined area in the ROI This area represents the maximum on screen size an object can have to be significant You can use this to exclude large objects from the search Browse Draw Delete Delete al If the Speed check box is not selected any moving object will be marked in the search results If the speed of moving objects is significant use the sliders on the Speed scale to specify a minimum speed a maximum speed or both for objects to be searched for 1 1 0 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG
99. TE 5 3 NOTE 5 3 1 5 4 NOTE NOTE 38 menus of the Configuration Console truncate them when the names are displayed Removing IP Camera Names To remove an IP camera select a particular camera button and click on the Remove button You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the camera The button on Configuration console for the camera is disabled and the name changed to Empty Ir Muuless TUENA TEZLER Se SUUITYY HH 1 ou ue 20 Empty Image Settings Resolution BAM emire Extende Are you sure you want to remove the selected IP camera Recording Setti Record Time Enable Arct SR M Live MV Alarm M YMD M CSD Enable Preview After removal an IP camera continues to record until you click OK or Apply on the Configuration console Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display By default all the cameras connected to your system are enabled for automatic display in Live mode If you want to remove a camera view from Live mode click on the Live check box to remove the check sym bol Vv When you next commit your changes the message No Input appears in the camera view of the disabled camera in Live mode Disabling Live mode display has no effect on recordings from the same camera Why disable Live Mode video display Images from IP cameras are compressed by the camera before being sent to the network To display these live images they m
100. TZ cameras are provided in Table E 2 in Appendix E Remote Control Commands on page 151 9 5 3 PTZ Function Key configuration For each camera protocol you can define up to 4 function keys Each function key has a description and the required programming codes to perform that function Select the required protocol and click the Function Keys button to edit or review these settings The Function Key buttons are accessed via the PTZ Control Dialog see Figure 9 6 on page 81 Configure Port vicon About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Seal PTZ Function Keys F1 Wash amp Wipe 1234 F2 Light On 5678 F3 Light Off SaB4 FA ff Hint Use c for Camera ID and b for the CheckSum Cancel Figure 9 7 PTZ Function Key settings The actual programming codes are specified in hexadecimal base 16 notation using digits 0 zero to 9 and letters A to F Consult the documentation supplied by the manufacturer of your PTZ camera for information about the correct protocol commands and syntax The description is the text displayed as a tool tip on the PTZ Control console 82 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Live Mode Operations 9 5 4 Joystick control of PTZ functions A manual joystick is available to control the functions of your PTZ cameras This unit plugs into one of your server s USB ports Moving the joystick to the left and right controls the pan functio
101. This enables you to configure VMD that ignores objects that move more quickly or slowly than the limits you define For more information see section 12 1 3 Enabled only for ROIs in Object Tracking mode A circular indicator divided into 8 segments each representing a direction of movement Selected segments are coloured red and de selected segments are white When a segment is selected any movement in that direction triggers VMD events in an object tracking an ROI For more information see section 12 1 3 Enabled only for ROIs in Object Removal mode Specifies a tolerable occlusion percentage for the object you want to guard This is the percentage of the object s on screen area that can be obscured by another object in the foreground with out causing a VMD event For more information see section 12 1 4 Enabled only for ROIs in Object Removal mode Used in conjunction with tolerable occlusion Specifies a time period in seconds for which an excessive occlusion can be tolerated without triggering a VMD event If the guarded object is occluded for longer than this period a VMD event occurs For more information see section 12 1 4 and section 12 1 5 Learning Duration Enabled for ROIs in Object Removal or Abandoned Object mode You can specify a time period in seconds during which the server should sample images from this camera to learn which objects belong permanently in the picture The server does not raise any
102. UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 v plettac Security UK Limited Glossary ACK Abbreviation of Acknowledgement Action required of operators to confirm that they have noted alarms and events Typically this action is a mouse click in the camera view in which the alarm or event has occurred ADC Administration Data Centre ADSL Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line A modem technology that converts existing twisted pair telephone lines into access paths for multimedia and high speed data communications ADSL can transmit up to 6 Mb s to a subscriber and as much as 832 Kb s or more in both directions AS IS A setting that leaves configuration in its present state or value ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Automatic Teller Machine Cash store accessed by a customer s credit or debit card Also referred to as cash machines and autobanks AV Audio Visual or Audio Video Bandwidth BDA Bi Directional Audio Optional feature of plettac FXL that can be configured for one CCTV camera to enable users of the NetManager application to communi cate verbally with people in the vicinity of that camera BNC Bayonet Nut Connector A type of connector used with coaxial cables The basic BNC connector is a male type mounted at each end of a cable This connector has a centre pin connected to the centre cable conductor and a metal tube connected to the outer cable shield A rotating ring outside the tube locks the cable to any female connector BNC connect
103. WOAGK smmsmamesopumtsnteonispsontonumssonsanensnore 103 MO a e AAA 93 LOMO VD ar AEE 93 to hard drive eseese 92 to network drive oo eee 92 write speed ooo ccc eccseeteeteeneeneenes 94 export utility oe cecnsereenee 17 F filtering events errn 97 G GSM audio compression eesse 34 IE aE NEA E 6 9 camera VIEWS eseese 11 Configuration Console 0 00 12 display area ee 10 AVOUT seeccogesicntesiortertereateseeseseceeteensetsecenss 13 MS ree cate cacatccnnectacsesstcstccte cesses 12 MAIN MENU ou cece ceeceseeecteerseeseeeens 9 MESSAGES ssseercnsiriscurnconenestsasiaroanctsperestys 14 mode selection unsure 12 PIAVOOCK ssmesistututistsnarsudrentse 12 15 Guidelines for archiving eee 143 H hard disks allocating ooeec 25 26 Clear esias 26 de allocating smsmmsmsrsrssrsssersrsrsrsrrsnnnrnrn 26 EXPONO missersersiamsaniites sl ktens 92 POTIONS oosrianstrsssnsier iain 26 USAGE murtlest ser ssu 21 hard drive See hard disks l identifiers defining for ATM integration 172 Image capture format aeee 31 image capture in Playback nns 95 Image Capture utility oo 17 image format CF anit ENNART naenie 31 interlaced ee Eee 77 inputs alarni erreren sekr RR 147 AUGO srt sger see san S BN 147 integrating an ATM ou eee 167 integration building SYSTEMS oo eee eeeeeeeees 6 MENACE eerror 9 interlaced image esses TI 19 March 2009 IP Camera AGANG serere e E ceases 36 configuration eseese
104. XL v4 4 186 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual 187 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 fo plettac Security UK Limited INTELLIGENT VIDEO PROCESSING plettac Security plettac Security UK Ltd Unit 39 Sir Frank Whittle Business Centre Great Central Way Rugby CV21 3XH Tel 0844 800 1725 Fax01788544549 Email info plettac co uk www plettac co uk
105. a Manager to au thorise access and a Manager would require another Manager or an Administrator Cameras Event vo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Sequencer Users Jortions Suspicious csp l Users and Groups Password Pe Access Rights Administrator Administrator Administrator Playback Guest Standard Use o e AlternatedAdmin Administrator Configuration a U 1 S tandard U ser Configuration FAAEA Standard User Dual Authentication a E S Add User Remove User Change Password About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 8 8 Dual authorisation required for a user 8 5 2 Allowing open access to a feature Use the Password Protection fields to specify whether a feature is freely open to users of each group or whether they must login to access them Table 8 7 shows a configuration with the Password Protection field left empty for all features This allows all users to access the features within the limits described in Table 8 5 on page 72 Password P Access Standard User Manager Administrator Protection Table 8 7 Open access to all features 8 5 3 Barring access to a particular feature Table 8 8 shows a configuration with the Password Protection field left empty for Playback and Export but enabled for Configuration The Standard User and Manager fields are enabled but not selected This forces users with Administrator privileges to login with their passwords to
106. acity on page 23 Alarm triggered Recordings Placed on Stack Size 5 The 5 most recent Alarms are protected p Camera 12 while in the Stack Alarm Input 2 18 12 03 19 10 Camera 2 Camera 4 i Alarm Input 4 18 12 03 18 20 Camera 7 Cameras 7 Camera 7 Cameras 8 Old i Renin Emerge from Stack and can be overwritten Figure 3 2 Alarms protected from overwrite while on the Alarm Stack Using the Event Review utility you can remove recordings from the protective stack For more information see section 10 6 7 Deleting Events from the plettac Sentio database on page 102 NOTE If you configure a maximum retention period for recordings on your system this takes precedence over the protection of the stack for any event based recordings that exceed the retention period For more information see section 3 3 Setting a Maximum Retention Period for Recordings on page 25 3 2 2 Calculating recording capacity The Recording Capacity table of the Capacity menu serves more as a predictive indicator of disk usage rath er than a snapshot of what is actually on disk at the moment When you open the Capacity menu initially the Recording Capacity table shows each camera s prospective disk usage assuming its current configuration remains constant under the following columns Column Description Camera Totals Shows the number and name of each camera connected to the plettac Sentio server At the bottom of this c
107. ack Mode Operations Table 10 3 CD amp DVD write speed configuration If your CD or DVD drive supports the specified speed the Export utility writes at that speed Otherwise it uses the closest supported speed Export from the plettac sentio server writes at 1x speed by default On remote clients Export uses the fastest write speed available Depending on system resources of the remote client machine you may or may not want to use this speed 10 3 4 Cancelling an Export While an export is under way you can cancel it using the button displayed with the Export progress indicator shown in Figure 10 5 on page 92 The system prompts you to confirm that you want to cancel the export When you confirm cancellation the export process terminates immediately if the target was a hard drive or network drive When the target is a CD or DVD it can take up to 30 seconds for the Export process to terminate if you cancel it This delay is most noticeable when the target media is rewriteable 10 4 Printing Images in Playback Mode NOTE NOTE The print utility prints still images from Playback mode while playing is paused For Print to function you must have a default printer installed If you are unsure about how to install a printer under Windows XP contact your system administrator or supplier Once a valid printer is installed use the following procedure 1 Switch to Playback mode 2 Play the video sequence from which you want to prin
108. an greatly enhance its value as evidence However if no audio input is associated with the selected camera using this option still exports a blank audio track which slightly increases the size of the export data Add Video Only Button that creates an entry in the export list that includes only the video tracks for the selected camera and times Fields of the Common Options panel Add Viewer Check box that includes the sPlayer application 1 5 MB in the export It is advisable to include sPlayer if you are exporting to removable media such as CD or DVD and you are unsure as to where the recordings will be played Primary control buttons of the Export dialog Export List List of video and audio video recordings to be included in the current export The filename of each export entry comprises the Camera Number and the start and end timestamps of the recording See section 10 3 1 2 File naming convention for Export Each entry is marked as AV or V to indicate whether it contains audio and video or just video data Target Capacity Indicator A vertical bar in the middle of the dialog that shows the total size of the entries in the Export List and the available storage space in the Target device Remove from List Button that removes a selected entry from the Export List Button that closes the dialog before you actually click either the Export button Export Button that confirms the export of the entries in the Export
109. ant use the sliders on the Size scale shown in Figure 12 2 to specify a minimum size a maximum size or both for objects to be detected in the ROI Oa As you drag the minimum size slider to the right a square with a green outline appears in the ROI Drawing Area The area of this square represents the minimum on screen size an object must have to trigger a VMD event in this ROI You can use this to prevent small and insignificant objects such as leaves or birds from causing VMD events 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options Ob As you drag the maximum size slider to the left a square with a blue outline appears in the ROI Drawing Area The area of this square represents the maximum on screen size an object can have to trigger a VMD event in this ROI You can use this exclude large objects from consideration for example in an area where people are forbidden to leave their vehi cles only objects that are smaller than a car require attention If the speed of moving objects is significant use the sliders on the Speed scale shown in Figure 12 2 on page 118 to specify a minimum speed a maximum speed or both for objects to be detected in the ROI Oa As you drag the minimum speed slider to the right a bright green line advances from the bottom left hand corner of the ROI Drawing Area The length of this line represents the dis tance an object would need to travel on the screen in one second to trigger a VM
110. area Patrol Continuous Defines a continuous Patrol Sequence The Patrol continues until it is interrupted by the operator Selecting this type disables the Patrol Timing area Patrol Periodic Defines Patrol Sequence that can be scheduled to be repeated at intervals Selecting this type enables the Run Patrol every field of the Patrol Timing area Table 8 1 Patrol Type options 66 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 System Administration Tasks In the System Cameras box on the left double click the first camera you want displayed in the Patrol sequence This creates an entry for it in the Selected Cameras for Patrol box Continue to double click other cameras in the System Cameras box in the order you want them displayed by the patrol If you want you can select a camera more than once for example to have your most important camera view displayed between each of the others in the sequence If you selected Patrol Continuous in step 2 the first camera view in the sequence follows the last when it cycles around so you should avoid having the same camera in first and last position in the se quence As the Patrol sequence displays live images it is not necessary for all the cameras you select to be configured to actually record In the Screen Setup area select a Master Monitor Layout for the Patrol sequence when it displays The drop down list includes all the display layouts ava
111. articular requirements and the frequency of other event types you may decide to include other types of event to the list To list other types of event use the following procedure 1 With the mouse pointer over the server icon at the top of the event tree click and hold down the right mouse button A pop up menu appears with an entry for each of the four event types as shown in Figure 10 9 Only event types that have a tick beside their entry appear in the list 25 EventReview vw Alarm w Suspicious Alarm Video Loss Camera Sabotage Refresh oof 01 OF Sep 14 26 38 Alarm oof 01 OF Sep 11 16 15 Alarm Lol ni ne Sen 17 02 47 Alarm Figure 10 9 Selecting event types for display in Event Review 2 Move the selection to an Event Type that you wish to add to or remove from the display and release the mouse button The utility displays the message Awaiting data while it automatically updates the list in the left pane according to your selection 3 You can add or remove event types from the display list only one at a time So you must repeat these steps for each modification NOTE Depending on the environment under surveillance and your configuration of VMD the system may have many more events of type VMD than of any other type For this reason the number of VMD PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 97 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 events that can be loaded into the Event Review is limited to the most rece
112. at remain on the hard drive beyond the specified retention period are automatically overwritten un less you decide to archive or export them You can use the plettac Sentio server s archival module Dynamic Re Archive to intelligently compress the data further without significantly reducing video quality patent pending In this way recordings of up to 30 days or more can be kept on the hard drive and therefore remain immediately accessible 1 4 11 Networked Service plettac Sentio servers are fully network enabled so any number of units can be networked over Ethernet serv ing a large number of camera groups in a flexible way Private networks of plettac Sentio servers can also be constructed Remote clients running NetManager NetManagerLite or sPlayer can connect to a server and view live and recorded images To preserve continuity of the video stream the plettac Sentio server scales images according to the speed of the network connection The plettac Sentio FXL is capable of serving images over Gigabit Ethernet LANs 1 4 12 Remote Monitoring and Configuration The NetManager application allows you to connect to and configure multiple cameras on multiple servers across your network Tasks you can perform include e monitor Live camera views e play back recorded data e export recorded data e configure the plettac Sentio server s operations A free to use version of NetManager called NetManagerLite can also be used for all the above
113. ate of continuous playback as the archival process will fall behind 4 During the archival process live playback images and audio may become jerky or even stop for a short while C 1 2 plettac EX The EX can be configured for both the PAL and NTSC versions to archive the maximum configurable i e no limitation images for single and multiple camera options However a maximum of two NetManagers may be attached with one in continuous playback exporting Points of note 1 With the archive feature in use Playback SearchExpert and Exporting should not be attempted directly from the server NetManager should be used for these functions 2 No Streaming should be attempted if the archive function has been configured 3 The NetManagers should not be left in a state of continuous playback as the archival process will fall behind 4 During the archival process live playback images and audio may become jerky or even stop for a short while C 1 3 plettac FX The FX can be configured for both the PAL and NTSC versions to archive the maximum configurable i e no limitation images for 4 8 12 and 16 camera options A maximum of two NetManagers may be attached with one in continuous playback exporting A streamer can also be attached Points of note 1 With the archive feature in use Playback SearchExpert and Exporting should not be attempted directly from the server NetManager should be used for these functions 2 The NetManagers an
114. ation configured for the event is Until Ack The Options tab contains a check box labelled Stop Rec on Alarm Acknowledgment which when checked modifies the default recording behaviour of the system m Alarm Options IV Stop Rec on Alarm Acknowledgment If you select the Stop Rec on Alarm Acknowledgment check box recordings of events stop immediately when acknowledged by users of the plettac Sentio GUI in Live mode Suppose a system is configured to record from one or more cameras for 15 minutes if an alarmed entrance such as a fire escape is opened However on occasion the same door is opened under supervision of se curity staff to take deliveries With the default configuration this would record 30 minutes of unnecessary footage on the system s storage However with the check box selected a member of security staff can ac knowledge the alarm when he sees the door opened by his colleague 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 amp plettac ecurity UK Limited CHAPTER 7 Configuring Scheduled Recording The Recording Schedules feature enables you to define and save different preset recording characteristics that can be applied to one or more cameras at different times For instance during normal business hours you may choose to record constantly from your interior cameras and use event based recording outside business hours For exterior cameras you might choose to use event based recording at all ti
115. ayback Speed Buttons ssmnosssssassressesrresrrrssranrrrnrrrr narr narr rrr rank rn ran r rann anna 16 Event Review ButtOn ominssnssssssessesrsrerrerrsresrereorrsrer reser ennen rer enn rn rer rn r rn rr rna 17 Playback PAOFBUNO N endene e E cusaeutetanenaaneees nance 17 Image Capture Button omno ssssosesssesrsssrsrrssrresrrerrrsrenrrnr ers rr rr rr rr kanna ran RK Reno nn 17 EXPO EUO aa E E eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 17 DOAN CHE xpe BUON asessorin iaun EANN 18 Coniguration Console geet cot cee candesceneecucanteeseve means eecarssaccnteosas seus 18 Layout of the Configuration Console sromnssrssrsrrssrerrerrer rar rrrrrn rer rrr rar ran rn ann 19 Buttons of the Configuration Console sssmssessrssrrsrresrrsrrrrrrrrr rens ren r rr rr rn nr an 19 Devising a Recording StrateOY ssssss smsrmsrmsrmarsssrssrnarnn ran 21 Planning Your Recordings oo oCossssrsesrsresrrerrerrerrenrrrrerrerrrrr ronne rr rr rerna reor anna 21 Estimating Recording Capacity enssmmrssresresrerrssrrsrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrr rer rer r ennen 21 Protecting Event related recordings ocommsssessesrerrsrrsrrerrsrrrsrrnrenrrnr enn ror ra 22 Calculating recording capacity osssesseesrersrsresrrsrrsrrerrrrrerrrn rr rr rer rann ennen nn 23 Setting a Maximum Retention Period for RecordingS ccmessseesreeren 25 Allocating Storage for Recordings ounmssessessresrrrsresrrsrrrrsrrerrrnr rer rrrrr narr aan 25 Allocating a hard disk for recording o mosmssessressresrrssrrsrrrrrrrrnrrrnrr
116. b PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 Tf Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 9 2 Dial up on Alarm with NetManager If you are using the NetManager application you may be contacted automatically by the plettac Sentio server when an Alarm condition occurs See section 6 7 Configuring Dial Up on Alarm on page 58 for more infor mation about this feature If the Dial up on Alarm option is configured on the plettac Sentio server and the address of your client is con figured as a possible dial up client your client may receive connections from the server so you can take appropriate action Refer to the NetManager User Guide for further information 9 3 Acknowledging Alarms For alarm events the border of the camera display turns red and the Alarm Acknowledgement popup ap pears with a red entry for the affected camera as shown in Figure 9 2 Type AlarmiInput Trigger Time CameraList amp Alam Input 01 2005 03 25 15 25 59 1 ACK amp Alam Input 02 2005 03 25 15 25 58 2 ACK Alam Input 03 2005 03 25 15 25 57 2 ACK amp Alam Input 04 2005 03 25 15 25 57 4 ACK Figure 9 2 Acknowledging alarms in Live mode Depending on how the Alarm has been configured the Alarm Acknowledgement popup may persist on screen for a number of seconds and then disappear However if the alarm duration is set to Until Ack it remains on screen until an operator physically acknowledges it by clicking the red ACK
117. bandwidth throttle via the plettac Sentio server Configuration console in order to limit the number of data packets sent between servers and client machines on the network NOTE In order to achieve a particular transfer rate the plettac Sentio software reduces the number of frames sent until the required limit is reached To set a Network Bandwidth Limit follow the steps below 1 Open the Options tab of the Configuration console and click the Enable Limit checkbox Options f r tarl i Interact Ld an EF BART HU TT TOT TTT TAR f Network Bandwidth Limit V Enable Limit 2 From the drop down list of limits select the required bits per second rate to be achieved For further information refer to Appendix B Network Bandwidth Requirements on page 141 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 65 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 8 2 Configuring a Patrol Sequence By configuring a so called Patrol you can have a sequence of camera views display automatically in Live Mode on the server s master monitor NOTE Patrol sequences can only be configured and are displayed only on the plettac Sentio server s master monitor Is is not possible to configure or view a Patrol Sequence from a remote client You can configure the Patrol to start at a specific time or at intervals or to run continuously The patrol can include some or all of the connected cameras and can include any camera more than
118. buttons described in section 2 5 you can choose from various screen mosaics to simultaneously display various numbers and sizes of camera views live or recorded If at any point you wish to view only one camera view double click that view with the left mouse button to expand it to fill the display area Repeating this action on the camera view reverts to the previous layout 1 0 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual 2 2 1 Camera Views Figure 2 2 shows a single camera view including some of the information the plettac Sentio FXL server displays in each camera view to show it s operations with that camera plettac Sentio FXL can display text and icons to indicate to users The plettac User Interface e the camera s identity e the date and time of the video capture current in Live Mode historic in Playback e whether it is currently recording from the camera Live Mode e whether an audio input channel is associated with the camera e whether an alarm condition has occurred for the camera Figure 2 2 e whether a VMD condition defined for the camera has been met Text labels displayed in a Live Camera View Table 2 1 describes the operational information plettac Sentio FXL can provide in each camera view Indicator Camera ID Video Capture Date and Time REC VMD Ack PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Meaning The plettac Sentio server displays the camera s name at the bottom left corner
119. camera s focus at any particular time Frames per Second see also ips Part of the analogue video signal that indicates the start of each frame Graphical User Interface Codec used for compression of audio data quality 2 Hard Disk Part of a unit often called a disk drive hard drive or hard disk drive that stores and provides relatively quick access to large amounts of data on an electromagnetically charged surface or set of surfaces The term hard is used to distinguish it from a soft or floppy disk Hard disks hold more data and are faster than floppy disks Hard disks for example can store several billion bytes gigabytes of data Hard Disk Drive The mechanism in a PC that controls the positioning reading and writing of the hard disk which furnishes the largest amount of data storage for the PC Although the hard disk drive and the hard disk are not the same thing they are packaged as a unit and so either term is sometimes used to refer to the whole unit Internet Protocol Images Per Second The capture rate of a video stream Integrated Services Digital Network A set of communications standards that defines how a single telephone cable or optical fibre can simultaneously carry voice digital network services and video using end to end digital connectivity ISDN supports data transfer rates of 64 cubits s 64 000 bits per second Multiple Hard Drive Term used to refer to systems that have more
120. camera 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 ay lettac Security UK Limited charter 5 IP Camera Configuration When installed on a network your plettac Sentio FXL can control and configure any IP camera also connected to the same network This includes configuring standard settings for the frequency and quality of images recorded To enable the IP camera functionality add the IPCamera run time parameter to the properties of the plettac Sentio server For additional information about adding run time parametners refer to Appendix G Run Time Configuration on page 159 D WARNING If you have to re start your plettac Sentio server at any time and do not have the IPCamera in the command line all previous IP camera configuration information will be lost A plettac Sentio FXL server can support up to 16 IP cameras This chapter describes how to configure the IP camera recording functions of the plettac Sentio FXL It contains the following sections The IP Cameras Tab Adding IP Cameras Customising IP Camera Names Removing IP Camera Names Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display Setting the Video Recording Quality Previewing Video Quality Specifying when a Camera should Record Setting the video recording rate Enabling Alarm Detection Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD Enabling Alarm Switch Recording NOTE It is strongly recommended that you do not a
121. cccccsscecsececeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeesans 174 View recordings associated with transactions ccccseceseeeeeeeeaees 176 SIOSS 5 See ene eee EA cee eee eee eee ee ee T 177 NENG E E E E E E EEE E A teen 181 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 4 piettac Preface About this manual This manual provides end users of the plettac Sentio System with information to support the day to day tasks involved in running and managing the system such as e configuring recording e monitoring live camera views e playing back recorded images Who should read this book This document is intended for Security personnel who use surveillance systems controlled by plettac servers and for System Administrators who configure their operations Assumed knowledge Throughout this document it is assumed that the reader has a thorough knowledge of e basic Media Player controls e cctv camera operation Typographic conventions The following conventions are used throughout this document to identify text that has special meaning Convention Used to Identify Italic text Names of commands or parameters Bold text Names of interface buttons and selections Code examples or commands entered at the prompt PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 IX Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Symbols The following symbols are used in the documentation to highlight important information Type of Information Important a
122. chive settings 3 From the drop down list in the Archive IPS field select the number of ips you want to archive from the cameras recordings If for example the camera always records at 16 ips you might choose to reduce this to 10 ips or 1 ips However if the camera uses event based recording to record at higher rates for Alarms and VMD you may not wish to reduce the data by so much PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 133 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Select As ls to leave the ips rate unchanged at whatever rate was recorded For instance you might choose this setting to Archive images recorded in alarm situations See section 12 8 5 Selecting recordings for Archive by Event type on page 136 You can also select rates of less that 1 image per second You can for example select 1 in 4 sec to archive only one image from every four seconds of recordings The rate you choose for archiving depends greatly on the type and importance of pictures the camera records and on how useful the video will still be following the loss of some images 4 From the drop down list in the Archive Quality field select either one of the options shown in Table 12 6 For detailed information about archival compression rates see section A 2 Archival Compression Ratios on page 140 Archive Quality Effect on images High Full colour images reduced to between 50 and 80 of original size depending on the original quality Low Full c
123. cious A 10 09 Dec 15 38 11 Suspicious me ell 09 Dec 15 38 02 Alarm 11 09Dec 15 37 53 Delete amp 11 09Dec 15 37 45 Review 2 10 09 Dec 15 37 44 ae 2 10 09 Dec 15 37 42 SUSpLmus M Figure 10 13 Enqueueing for Export all recordings associated with an Event NOTE An important difference between the selection of event based recordings for review and for export is that Export includes the Pre Event period in the exported recording by default Whereas Playback starts all reviews from the trigger time only Compare the values under RecStartTime and TriggerTime in Figure 10 13 3 Open the Export utility by clicking the Export button at the bottom of the Event Review screen as shown in Figure 10 14 Alternatively you can use the Export button of the Playback interface but you must then close or minimise the Event Review screen manually Figure 10 14 4 Inthe Export dialog the recordings of the selected event are already in the list of items to be exported You can manually add and delete additional export items but if you quit from the Export utility all enqueued entries are lost You cannot modify the start or end time of entries added by Opening the Export utility from Event Review PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 101 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 the Event Review utility If you wish to do so you must delete these automatic entries from the list and manually add a new export entry
124. cious Archive ov Stacked Suspicious Stacked Alarms DURATION Normal Discard Event Activity Estimated Event Actryity Data Protection Settings Set Data Retention Period About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 3 3 Effects of enlarging event stacks on system capacity 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Devising a Recording Strategy 3 3 Setting a Maximum Retention Period for Recordings 7 INFORMATION In some countries the length of time CCTV recordings can be stored on disk is limited by law You can ensure that your system remains within the legal limits by imposing a maximum retention period To set a maximum retention period click the check box labelled Set Data Retention Period This enables a text entry box in which you can specify the maximum period for which you can legally store recordings on your system This period differs from country to country After this period recordings are au tomatically deleted If you specify a retention period of four days all recordings are automatically deleted when they are older than four days whether the server needs to overwrite them or not This configuration overrides stack protection Event based recordings that are still in their protective stacks when they exceed the retention period are also deleted 3 4 Allocating Storage for Recordings S WARNING Figure 3 4 shows the Engineering menu of the Configuration Console
125. console appears with a screen layout capable of displaying recordings from all of the cameras associated with the event For instance if the event triggered recording from two cameras the 4 tile layout is used Playback is paused at the event time So if the server is configured to record a Pre Event period from any of the cameras you must use the Playback controls to review it RecStartTime RecEndTime AudioList fEventDiscription 08 Dec 17 09 33 Suspicious 1 08 DecO3 14 58 22 08 Deca 14 58 42 08 Deca 14 58 22 08 Dec 17 09 33 Alarm 2 08 Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 O08 Dec0a 14 58 22 oe IRE Ayala air 3 3 08 Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 08 Dec03 14 58 22 SKE ao 4 0S Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 08 Decds 14 58 22 5 08 Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 O08 Dec0a 14 58 22 ne 6 08 Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 08 Dec0a 14 58 22 Enqueue For Export St 7 08 Dec03 14 58 22 08 Dec03 14 58 42 O08 Dec0a 14 58 22 See 2 no hee 14A C002 ne hen 4A CAT no Peet 1A ooo 08 Dec 17 09 33 Suspicious 10 08 Dec03 15 39 44 08 Dec03 15 39 56 Alarm 3 08 Dec 17 09 33 Alarm 11 08 Dec03 15 39 44 08 Dec03 15 39 56 Alarm i 08 Dec 17 09 33 Alarm gE nananzizioae 08 Dec03 13 20 07 Suspicious Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZB 08 Dec 15 56 22 Suspicious Delete 08 bec03 13 10 30 Alarm 3 08 Dec 15 56 22 Alarm 08 Dec03 13 10 29 Alarm 4 FR Tesa ale gj Enqueue for Export 05 Dec03 17 51 42 Suspicious Alarm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 08 Dec 15 40
126. d for it scale that you can use to increase and decrease the amount of movement that triggers a VMD event in all regions of interest defined for the current camera Check box that specifies that tracked abandoned or removed objects be highlighted in the camera view of the SVMD camera in Live mode This check box is enabled only on the SVMD camera Settings that apply to Individual ROIs 116 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual GUI Element ROI Drawing Area Product Options Description Check box that specifies the mode s of VMD that is to apply to the Region of Interest ROI you are drawing or configuring VMD is the default selection and its default ROI covers the full camera view In each camera configuration you can combine standard VMD ROls with ROIs of one other advanced mode Object Tracking Object Removal Abandoned Object These modes are not available for selection if any one of them is already being used in another camera s VMD configuration The Camera configured with an advanced mode of VMD appears in the drop down list with SVMD suffix If you want to use only an advanced mode of VMD on the camera you can disable standard VMD by unchecking its box Standard ROIs remain in their drawn positions and can be viewed when VMD is enabled again Radio Buttons that focus your configuration on one mode of ROI at a time When you click the Radio button opposite a mode of VMD only
127. d streamer should not be left in a state of continuous playback as the archival process will fall behind PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 143 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 C 1 4 C 1 5 144 3 During the archival process live playback images and audio may become jerky or even stop for a short while plettac FXL The FXL can be configured for both the PAL and NTSC versions to archive the maximum configurable i e no limitation images for 4 8 12 and 16 camera options A maximum of two NetManagers can be attached with one in continuous playback exporting A streamer can also be attached Points of note 1 With the archive feature in use Playback SearchExpert and Exporting should not be attempted directly from the server NetManager should be used for these functions 2 The NetManagers and streamer should not be left in a state of continuous playback as the archival process will fall behind 3 During the archival process live playback images and audio may become jerky or even stop for a short while plettac PXL The PXL may be configured so that the maximum Camera IPS Event IPS and Archival IPS are set as fol lows Maximum Maximum Maximum Archive IPS per camera Recorded Camera Recorded Event IPS per camera IPS per camera wo o a CS CC QCIF CIF 2CIF 4CIF NTSC systems only A maximum of two NetManagers can be attached with one in continuous playback exporting A streamer may a
128. d to s where s is 1 2 4 or 8 Select n View mode where n is 1 4 9 10 13 or 16 ZCf p Execute PTZ Command function f with a parameter p see below PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 151 PCb Select Play Control button b where b is O Fast Rewind 1 Reverse Play 2 Reverse Frame 3 Forward Frame 4 Play Forward 5 Fast Forward 6 Stop Fast motion Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Command String Function ZSC Select camera c for PTZ control where c is 1 to 16 Query the current server name V Query the protocol version currently this returns the string DVMS host controller protocol V1 5 Table E 1 plettac sentid Remote Control Commands E 2 Pelco PTZ Cameras Table E 2 shows commands that have been tested for Pelco Spectra III cameras using D protocol Command String Function Table E 2 Pelco camera Function Key commands NOTE Command sets for other cameras are available Contact the plettac customer support team for details E 3 MCI Emulation Commands The plettac senti0 server can emulate the Machine Control Interface MCI specified in the Dedicated Micros DIGITAL SPRITE LITE products and supports the following commands MCI Command Function lt esc gt M CBUS LINK SET ESUPPORT Ignored MODE PRO lt esc gt M PLAY GOTO 1 52 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Remote Control Commands MCI Command Function lt esc gt M TELM_MTN NB Iris comman
129. dditional information that may be of use while performing a procedure Information that describes situation in which either dangers the effec tive operation of the system or the health and safety of end users could be at risk Ignoring such warnings nullifies all support agreements re WARNING lating to this plettac product Trademarks All trademarks or registered trademarks that appear in this document are the property of their respective own ers Related Documents In conjunction with this document you may also need to read e plettac Sentio Installation Guide e plettac Sentio 4 4 Quick Start Guide X 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 piettac ecurity UK Limited CHAPTER 1 plettac the complete solution for networked video plettac Ltd offers a complete range of intelligent video management systems enabling the construction of extensive networked video solutions Video and audio are acquired recorded and served by plettac systems Depending on your requirements plettac provides scalable solutions to suit the size and video format of your network All plettac systems use the plettac GUI software to make and playback the recordings So if you need to expand your system you will always have a familiar interface You can also monitor and review recordings using the NetManager NetManagerLite and sPlayer software tools This chapter provides an overview of the plettac FXL system It contains the following
130. deo Motion Detection VMD To enable Video Motion Detection VMD for a camera select the VMD check box This enables the system to detect movement of objects within a camera view Further configuration is required on the VMD tab of the Configuration Console See section 6 3 Configuring VMD for a Camera on page 45 for more information To reduce the amount of data recorded on disk you can configure the plettac Sentio server to record from cer tain cameras only when VMD events occur See section 6 2 Basic VMD Configuration on page 44 for more information Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD To enable Camera Sabotage Detection CSD for an IP camera select the CSD check box This enables the system to detect whether a camera has been moved defocussed or obscured For further information see section 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD on page 125 Enabling Archiving of recorded images To enable archiving of your recorded data select the Enable Archive check box When this check box is selected the Archive IPS field is enabled and you can enter a value for the IPS rate to be applied to the ar chived recordings from the selected IP camera PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 41 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 5 7 Enabling Alarm Switch Recording With a special switch connected to the alarm input port of the plettac Sentio server you can configure an IP camera to record only when this s
131. display The speaker icon turns dark grey The speaker icon is a toggle key so clicking again re ena bles audio output The Master Audio Controls override any audio settings made in individual camera views but the system re members these settings and restores them when system wide audio is re enabled NOTE The audio settings of remote clients are unaffected by the server s master audio controls Do not make any adjustment to the Windows audio settings These are configured when the plettac server is manufactured PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 3 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 2 8 On Screen Keyboard In the bottom right hand corner of the main screen adjacent to the Master Audio Controls is the On Screen Keyboard OSK icon plettac Sentio servers are designed to operate as stand alone units once installed and configured but occasionally you may need to make minor adjustments to the settings of controls When you have attached a mouse to your Sentio unit access the control you need to adjust and then click on the OSK icon to display a virtual keyboard Use the mouse to select the required text On Screen Keyboard re x File Keyboard Settings Help esc ro riore pse brk O lilelslajsjelz efs o f bksp fins rm pupil 2 o Talwfetsdityfufifofot rit Pactfend oad z s Stat sJaltTolnJilkfiT TT en a de slelvJ ofaf ep ED ctr Figure 2 3 On screen keyboard 2 9 Me
132. display the Playback controls console in Playback mode 2 10 Playback Console IS WARNING When you change to playback mode the Playback console occupies the area of the main screen below the Display Area Figure 2 4 shows the Playback console which enables you to play recorded video and audio data that is stored on the plettac sentio server s hard drives 4 1 EVENT a 5 DATE Dasa o II ROP aa Cec 5 6 10 3 2 3 7 8 9 Figure 2 4 The Playback console The Playback Console comprises the following elements Element Reference 0 2 10 1 Playback Time Line The colour coded Playback Time Line provides a visual way to quickly select recorded data to view using ee eae teens eee 2 either the capture time or the presence of Events in the data The time line displays a 24 hour period of recorded data stored on the plettac Sentio server The vertical blue line in the centre of the time line marks the time stamp of images currently being played You can also use the Capture Time Display to adjust the period shown By clicking on any point on the time line you move that point to the blue line and play its associated images in the display area Selecting recordings for playback that are too close to the current time diminishes the quality of video and audio reproduction To guarantee proper video reproduction start playback at least 5 seconds after the current time To guarantee proper audio and video repro
133. drop down list of cameras that have been enabled for VMD in the Cameras menu One of these camera names may have the suffix SVMD if SVMD features have been configured for it Sensitivity Sliding scale that you can use to increase and decrease the amount of movement that triggers a VMD event in all regions of interest defined for the current camera Output on Display This check box is activated only if you have purchased the SVMD product option ROI Drawing Area Area in which the selected camera view is displayed and in which ROIs can be drawn and selected for modification or testing A default ROI covers the entire drawing area but is disabled once you draw one When an VMD mode is selected all ROIs with that mode are displayed as clear areas in a greyed out overlay that covers the drawing area Greyed out areas represent parts of the image outside the ROIs When you select an ROI it appears outlined in yellow Delete ROI button Deletes the currently selected ROI See section 6 3 3 Delete All button Deletes all ROIs in the current camera view See section 6 3 3 Start Test Provides a live test of the current VMD configuration See Figure 6 3 on page 47 Table 6 2 Basic VMD configuration settings 6 3 Configuring VMD for a Camera VMD is a powerful feature that enables you to configure the plettac Sentio FXL server to modify the way it records a camera s input when there is motion in a camera view or in selected Reg
134. ds ignored any stop stops all motion Table E 3 MCI emulation commands The username and password used can either be specified on the command line or the login dialog of the server GUI PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 153 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 154 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 lettac security UK Limited iy AppennixF Plettac ActiveX Control plettac provides a standard ActiveX control to enable live video to be shown in any ActiveX container The control connects to one of the channels of a plettac server and streams video data using the native wavelet compression of plettac systems The plettac ActiveX control provides Properties and Methods that enable programmers to modify the op eration and appearance of the video display This appendix provides information on the plettac ActiveX control It comprises the following sections e F 1 ActiveX Overview e F 2 Properties and Methods for ActiveX e F 3 ActiveX Installation e F 4 Example of plettac sentiO Controls in HTML F 1 ActiveX Overview You can use the plettac ActiveX control to construct interfaces that stream video data from a plettac sentiO server Typically these applications are integrated into Web browsers If the ActiveX application s web server runs on the same machine as the plettac server it can stream both Live and Recorded images to clients that connect to it If the ActiveX application s web se
135. ds the information about any cameras that respond to the message The value entered in the Time Out field is the length of time that the server will wait for a response from a camera Some brands of camera for example Panasonic do not respond to polls A Panasonic camera broadcasts an identifying packet every 10 seconds for the first 20 minutes after it has been switched on After this 20 minute period you can connect to the camera if you know its IP address otherwise the camera must be restarted When any IP cameras are located on the network the details for each are displayed in the Cameras Found panel This is illustrated in Figure 5 3 Add IP Cameras Ea Search Criteria Camera Type All v Time Out secs 2 IP Address All c Pott fo Search Cameras Found MAC Address IP Address J C N C30U 00 80 88 C01 23 2F 10 201 21 200 4 20 J C N C30U 00 80 89 C1 26 67 10 201 21 201 4 30 Camera Name juve 3 Password Camera Slot 28 Empty tof Add Selected Close Figure 5 3 Example results of a search for IP cameras on the network Select a camera and enter a name for it in the Camera Name field If required you can also enter a password to increase security when communicating with the camera Click the Add Selected button and the camera will be assigned to the next available IP camera slot on the system or you can select a slot from the drop down list A message will be displa
136. duction allow a 10 second lag before starting Playback The grey areas to either side of the time line represent capture times that have been overwritten on disk and those that have not yet been recorded Recorded data is shown in white yellow and red White areas represent time stamps that are recorded on disk If you have configured event based recording on your system you can quickly identify times when events occurred by selecting Yellow areas for VMD events or Red areas for alarms This helps you to quickly locate significant recordings on your system PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 5 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 2 10 2 Capture Time Display The digital time display at the centre of the console shows the time at which the images currently being played back were captured from camera You can click on this display and type in a new time to the near est second and skip to that time in Playback 2 10 3 Playback Buttons The Playback buttons use the standard conventions of most modern media playing devices Buttons marked with arrows pointing to the right play video forwards and those with arrows pointing left play in reverse The currently active Playback button is displayed in mauve Inactive buttons are displayed in dark grey In each play direction you can play at normal speed at fast speed or one frame at a time Table 2 3 shows the forward and reverse play buttons of the Playback console
137. dvise them or listen to requests they make via an intercom system This section is concerned with configuring the audio output from a remote client For information about con figuring audio input to the plettac server see section 4 11 Configuring Audio Recording on page 33 12 3 1 Configuring the server for sBDA 1 To configure Bi Directional Audio double click on the sBDA desktop icon The Bi Directional Audio configuration dialog appears as shown in Figure 12 10 Bi Directional Audio Talk Back Receiver As CELP GSM Figure 12 10 2 Enter the IP address of the host s Machines previously configured for sending data to your client may be displayed in the pick list and be available for selection 124 sBDA Configuration Dialog PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options 3 Select the data compression None 64 kbit s or GSM 13 2 kbit s When audio data is being received the background of the Rx box changes to green If this data is compressed by the GSM codec the background of the GSM box changes to green 4 Click the Half duplex check box to use half duplex mode which can avoid acoustic feedback by forcing the communicating parties to speak alternately 1 Close Bi Directional Audio configuration You can also use the Bi Directional Audio Configuration dialog to open the microphone and address people using SBD or to configure auto audio Alternatively you can also perfor
138. e a La a Elle eee EU La a S U w rP PrP O i A OO eS ef iF E Me i COO ae w R P po pri MO H dl NOTE The resolution of an IP camera varies depending on the manufacturer Most camera models have three settings available PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 45 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 146 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 lettac Security UK Limited yy APPEnDIx D Video Audio and Alarm Inputs The positions of the video audio and alarm connections in the rear of the plettac FXL casing have major implications for the selections available on the Cameras menu of the Configuration Console This appendix provides information on the various inputs connected to the rear of the plettac FXL casing It comprises the following sections e D 1 Video Inputs e D 2 Audio Inputs e D 3 Alarm Inputs amp Outputs D 1 Video Inputs Figure D 1 shows the PCl card connections at the rear of a 12 port plettac F XL Video Inputs Alarm Inputs 9 12 Alarm Output 3 Figure D 1 Video Audio and Alarm Inputs There are 4 video inputs on each video capture card The numbering of inputs starts with the left most card and on each card video inputs are numbered upwards from the base of the unit The plettac FXL can have up to 16 video inputs via coaxial cables to BNC sockets NOTE Figure D 1 provides an example of video audio and alarm inputs only Do not be concerned if your system has a differ
139. e as that of each ATM if the ATM is directly con nected to the server or to be the same as that of the multiplexor if ATMs are connected to your server via a PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 169 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 multiplexor Repeat this step for each of device directly connected to the plettac server s COM port that uses RS232 serial communication protocol IVMS supports three type of line terminators as follows 1 CRLF carriage return and line feed 2 CR Carriage return 3 LF line feed Multiplexor ATM Multiplexor Associated COM Port COM Port Number com x Bits Per Second fso HH Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control Line Terminator LF The Number of Days before Purging Recordings 7 About Open Save Close ATM configuration with fields enabled Figure J 3 Select the required values for the Associated COM Port settings fn Pe Leni _ a Lg Bete i a Fie Lome 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 170 User Manual ATM Integration Select the end of line designator used by your multiplexor or if no multiplexor is used the ATM in the Line Terminator field Line Terminator LF J 4 2 ATM configuration Select the ATM tab to configure ATMs to be integrated with IVMS When you first use AtmConfig exe you will have to create an ATM entry for each ATM to be integrated The left hand panel of the ATM tab lists al
140. e configurable elements that apply to those ROIs are still not activated until you use the mouse to select an ROI explicitly The selected ROI is outlined in yellow and the configuration takes on the settings that were saved for that ROI The Delete ROI button becomes active If you deselect the Enable button for any mode of VMD or SVMD ROls of that mode are no longer visible until you reselect the mode and click the ROI radio button It is possible to draw ROls so that they overlap each other If you select an ROI that is partially overlapped by another its yellow outline may be partly hidden by the overlapping ROI but it has no effect on the configuration of the lower ROI Take care however not to completely overlap ROIs of the same mode This would make the overlapped ROI unselectable and you would therefore not be able to modify its configuration without first deleting the ROI that overlaps it Figure 12 7 shows a selected ROI that is overlapped slightly by another ROI Its yellow edge is not visible where it is overlapped Cameras Evert WMD Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious Video Motion Detection MMD Camera o3 Camera 03 Sensitivity Level jo g Output Gn Display Delete AOI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 7 VMD Configuration with multiple ROIs 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product
141. e ii 1 PlONS cecciciecesctscssceassiede Gesyeascenrdeinoreseaes 60 POPUD aore 14 FECUITENCE ooo eeccecsceccsseecssesetseseeseseees 58 STACK siper 22 SUSPICIOUS missnsrssssrsrsrsrssesrsrsresesererrr nn enn nn 55 alarm switch unsnnnsmnnsssnssssssssessn 29 34 40 42 alarm based recording override ee 78 alarms asercanescecsecsrcarennteand aauveantennenmutoresh 4 acknowledging eessen 78 COMMUTATION seccensiccsssseesvesiartcsrezcian 45 49 daD aera nen ne eee 58 60 78 enabling sessist 32 41 MOUT siereceneaen ann 49 148 network oosooeeerssrsrsresesesesreresesesrerenrnrnr rr rn ra 131 01514 010 SR 51 52 53 148 video lOSS misnessesressrrrsrrerserrsserrsser rann 52 53 archive compression ratios masse 140 configuration eesse 133 PIEVIGW mossssserrsrsrsresrsesesreresesesrrrerrnr nn rn rna 134 Product OPtiON ou eee 133 time before ou 135 time limit cece cre eee eees 135 ACIIVINO srera EEE 5 guidelines eessen 143 restrictions ooeec 143 ATM configuration eeen 171 19 March 2009 ATM integration een 167 ATM and multiplexor settings 169 CONMPIQUINING oeer 169 defining identifier types 172 programming uesmeesrsrssrersrsrsseresrsrsnrnrn en 168 ATM transaction search ACCESSING usssssssrsresssesrsrereseserrrrerenrrr nr nn 173 refining searches nns 174 Simple searches Lasses 173 viewing recordings musser 176 audible alarm re 53 audio associated with video 33 bi directional oo eee eeeeeeeeenees 5 124
142. e input alarm circuit is changes from closed to open or from open to closed The meaning of Open or Closed depends on the physical wiring or your alarm circuits and alarm blocks Table 6 3 Input State settings for external alarms You are able to associate the same alarm input with more than one camera but the Input State must be the same for all cameras If different input states are selected the message shown below will be displayed Message ES A For each alarm input only one state can be set Selected alarm input has different state setting for other cameras 4 Click in the Event Duration field From the drop down list select the period for which you want the alarm event to be displayed in Live mode Choose Until Ack to have the alarm displayed until an operator physically acknowledges it by clicking on the Alarms console or specify one of the pre defined durations to have the alarm automatically clear after that time Whether the system continues to record an event following its acknowledgment is determined by a selection made on the Options menu For more information see section 6 8 5 When an event occurs it may be more important to see what happened before the alarm or VMD was triggered than the images that follow the event You can specify that the plettac Sentio server modify its recording behaviour for the duration of the alarm event By configuring the Event IPS Event Quality Pre Event and Pre Event Duration field
143. e line the search will match the identifier and then ignore any blank space until it locates the next character Starting with this character Search Expert will check if the value is in the specified range 2 If your ATM records items on separate lines the search will match the identifier and skip any end of line character and then use the first non blank character as the start of the value to check if that value is in the specified range NOTE If your ATM records a standard currency symbol such as GBP or preceding any monetary amounts in a transaction you must ensure that the symbol is part of the definition of any corresponding numeric identifier if information is printed on one line If information is printed on separate lines you must ensure that the symbol is one of the numeric identifiers For example in the following type of transaction record SAR must be defined as a numerical identifier using AtmConfig if the transaction amount following the symbol SAR is to be searched 001 TRANSACTION BEGIN 001 19 11 03 14 11 001 RECETIPT 00380 001 CARD NO 440647010929 001 ACC 01092900164 001 ACCOUNT BALANCE 001 SAR 774700 00 CR 001 CASH BALANCE 001 3800 RIYALS 001 TRANSACTION END Alternatively you may know that a particular phrase or word appears in a transaction record Activate a search field by selecting the check box adjacent to it and type in the word or phrase NOTE If you have more than one term for which you want to
144. e to switch to single camera view e The icon appears grey when not in use e When selected the printer icon changes to a mauve colour For more information see section 10 4 Printing Images in Playback Mode on page 95 NOTE For Print to function you must have a default printer installed If you are unsure about how to install a printer under Windows XP contact your system administrator or supplier 2 10 8 Image Capture Button Using the Image Capture button which depicts a camera you can capture a single still image from one or more video sequences that are paused in Playback When not in use the Image Capture button appears as a monochrome depiction of a camera When clicked the button changes to a mauve colour When one or more images are captured the camera on the button appears to flash For more information about using the Image Capture utility see section 10 5 Capturing Images in Playback Mode on page 95 2 10 9 Export Button Click on this button to open the export utility which enables you to save a portion of your recorded video data in a variety of standard file formats to external storage media External storage is any device that is not written to directly by the plettac sentio server It can be a hard drive of another machine in your network or a CD DVD or USB flash memory Export is described in detail in section 10 3 Exporting Recordings on page 90 PL UG FXL PAL ENG
145. e transient Because the objects that you want to guard may be temporarily obscured by objects moving in the foreground you can configure a tolerable level of occlusion for the ROI In the Occlusion field specify the percentage of the ROI that can be occluded without triggering a VMD event If you specify a 90 occlusion rate no VMD events are triggered as long as 10 of the ROIs permanent content remains visible If transient objects frequently exceed the occlusion threshold of the ROI for short periods you can configure the server not to trigger VMD events for short term occlusions In the Duration before alarm field specify the minimum duration in seconds that an occlusion or disappearance must last before triggering a VMD event This duration needs to be long enough to make the event significant but not so long as to compromise the recording of security breaches 12 1 5 Configuring Abandoned Object SVMD In some security scenarios the deposition of a foreign objects such as unattended luggage may be of pri mary concern 120 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options Abandoned Object mode VMD enables you to configure a camera to trigger VMD events when a unfamiliar object appears in the camera view To configure a camera to use Abandoned Object mode VMD use the following procedure 1 Open the VMD menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 12 6 Cam Event YMD P review Patrol Capaci
146. ee section 10 2 Examples of external alarms could be e the opening of an alarmed window or door e the opening of a badge access door e the raising of a car park barrier e the operation of a turnstile 6 4 1 Associating an alarm input with cameras Alarm inputs are numbered according to the alarm ports at the rear of the plettac Sentio server s casing to which they are connected as shown in Appendix D Video Audio and Alarm Inputs on page 147 The connection of alarm cables to the input plugs is described in the plettac Sentio FXL Installation Guide The plettac Sentio server detects the number of available alarm ports and lists them in the Alarm Input drop down list in the Event menu of the Configuration Console whether or not inputs are connected to them To associate an alarm input with one or more cameras use the following procedure 1 On the Event menu of the Configuration Console shown in Figure 6 11 on page 55 click in the Alarm Input field of the camera with which you want to associate the alarm input 7 Cameras Ewent Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious tame Seon ron sine ompa oupa panton Site Hame paat sanien Duration Output aoma aa State Camera 01 Closed Closed Saas 02 Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera 07 Camera 08 Closed Input 01 Nor T Closed E sai p Closed Oh Closed See aa 04
147. eed is further acceler ated by 8 For example when playing with the speed set to x4 holding the FastForward button will play the images at 32 times the normal speed NOTE The audio track associated with any video data will only be played at normal speed x1 1 6 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual The plettac User Interface 2 10 6 Event Review Button Using the Event Review button which depicts the Event Review Interface you can open the Event Review utility to search through the recordings on your system and identify video sequences associated with specific types of events or with specific cameras You can then use the utility to display export and delete recordings associated with events The Event Reviewer s filter enables you to include or exclude the following event types in the display e VMD events e Contact Alarms e Suspicious Alarms e Camera sabotage events e Video Loss Alarms For more information about using the Event Review utility see section 10 2 Locating Alarm and VMD Events on page 89 2 10 7 Playback Print Button Using the Image Print button which depicts a printer you can print a single still image from one or more video sequences that are paused in Playback The utility prints each camera view currently displayed in Playback If 16 tiles are displayed then all 16 camera views are printed If you want to print only one of the camera views you must first double click that til
148. eeeeeeeeenees 118 12 1 4 Configuring Object Removal SVMD cccccceccceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 119 12 1 5 Configuring Abandoned Object SVMD ssvtnsssssassressrrsrrrrrrsrrrnrrrn rer r rn rna 120 12 1 6 Modifying and deleting SVMD ROIS etssssssessrssrrssrsssrssreerrnsrrorrrsr innnan 121 12 1 7 VID M EVS NOG Coats goatee a E 123 12 2 Multi Channel Audio missesssssessrssrsrrsrrsrrsrrerrer rr rrrr ror rr rr nr rar rer rr rr rr rer innnan 123 12 3 BEONECHONaLAWGIO siopa a 124 12 3 1 Configuring the server for SBDA c ccccsececeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeaeeesaeees 124 12 3 2 Opening the microphone manually for SBDA ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 12 3 3 Setting Auto Audio and Background Noise level cccceeeeeeeeees 125 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD J ssssssssessrrsrrssresrrssrrsrrrnrrrrr ronne renar 125 12 4 1 Configuring a camera for CSD s sssnsrssessrssraesrrssrrrrrrsrrrrrrrrr rer ren r rens rr rr ennen nan 126 12 5 Video SEQUENCEL ccceccceecceseeeeecseetenecenecnecetseceeeeceueeseetseeenaeeneeeneeees 127 12 5 1 Configuring the Sequencer cccceececeeceeececeeeeeeeeeceeceseeeeseeeeaeeeesaees 127 12 6 INS pce ccs ce sera nee se sss ew cee E 129 12 6 1 Starting NetAler asic sineu sniie ctinnidioenenstetionniciee deea n ia an inais 129 12 6 2 OTTO N EVAS E seee e S A E 130 12 6 3 NetAlert alarm conditions mnmssssesserrserrsrerrerrerrerrorer renen rrrr error
149. ent number of inputs PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 147 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 D 2 NOTE D 3 148 Audio Inputs Figure D 2 shows the PCl card connections at the rear of a 12 port plettac FXL Figure D 2 Audio inputs The plettac FXL can have up to 16 audio inputs to the dual audio alarm cards Figure D 2 provides an example of audio and alarm inputs only Do not be concerned if your system has a different number of inputs Alarm Inputs amp Outputs Alarm connectivity blocks will be vertical when located in a PCI slot or horizontal when located at the back panel Alarm cards and combined Alarm Audio cards are available Figure D 3 shows an example of the alarm ports of a 12 channel plettac FXL system with 3 dual alarm audio cards 1 4 ls Os Alarm Inputs 1 4 Alarm Inputs 9 12 Alarm Output 1 Alarm Output 3 Figure D 3 Alarm inputs and outputs Alarm cables screw into alarm blocks and simply push into alarm connectors 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Video Audio and Alarm Inputs All alarm blocks are wired the same way as shown in Figure D 4 Alarm Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Not Used Alarm Output Change over Relay Closed Figure D 4 Secure alarm block wiring using the screws on the right PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 149 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 50 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03
150. eo Quality The IP Cameras tab of the plettac Configuration Console can display a Preview of the image from a particular camera An example is shown in Figure 5 5 Analogue Cam IP Cameras Event vvo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio prz Users Options Suspicious csp 17 ip1 Properties ip3 isi Name Ip 19 Empty Type VC VN C30U Version 4 20 20 Empty IP ddress 10 201 21 200 MAC Address 00 80 88 C1 23 2F 21 Empty Image Settings 22 Empty Resolution 352 x 240 Quality EE EY Extended Settings 24 Empty 25 Empty Recording Settings 26 Empty Record Time Always oat pani ne 27 Empty Enable Archive Archive IPS A 28 Empty IV Live IV Alarm I YMD csp 29 Empty 30 Empty 31 Empty 32 Empty Add Remove About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Apply Figure 5 5 An example of an enabled Preview for an IP camera To familiarise yourself with the various video quality settings available you can view the Preview at its actual size as determined by the Resolution setting selected Click the icon in the top right hand corner of the cam PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 39 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 era view display on the IP Cameras tab An illustration of the views for the three resolutions available on a particular JVC IP camera are shown in Figure 5 6 To close this camera view display click the O in the top r
151. er information about schedules refer to Chapter 7 on page 61 The figures in the Total column are calculated using the values on the Cameras tab only If the sum displays a value less than 100 percent you may still receive a warning message because when OK or Apply is clicked the system checks to see if any Event IPS rate might make the total exceed the maximum To minimise disk space usage set a low or zero ips rate for constant recording Always and use event based recording to trigger a higher ips rate when an event occurs However the system calculates the maximum potential ips that the combined event based settings require and if they exceed the system s maximum dis plays the same warning See Appendix A Compression and Archival Ratios on page 139 for more infor mation Exceeded maximum ips r Reduce in interval on Monday at 00 01 Figure 4 2 ips exceeded warning message If the message in Figure 4 2 appears press OK and review the last configuration change you made in the Camera Event or Schedules tabs If the increased recording rate for that camera is essential you must re duce the ips used by other cameras to keep within the system s maximum recording rate Setting the Video Recording Quality If you have specified Always or On alarm switch in the Record Time column of the Cameras tab the Quality field also becomes active 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE 4 6 1 NOT
152. era should be recorded constantly This is the initial setting for all cameras All the other columns to the right of Record Time are active when Always is selected Specifies that the input from the camera should never be recorded All the columns to the right of Record Time are disabled when Never is selected If you specify this value on the plettac Sentio system it also disables live display from that camera On alarm switch Specifies that the plettac Sentio server should record from the camera only when it receives a signal from a special button connected to the systems alarm input ports The Alarm and VMD columns are disabled when On alarm switch is selected For more information see section 4 12 Enabling Alarm Switch Recording on page 34 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 29 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 4 5 NOTE 4 6 30 Effect Default or lt Schedule gt Specifies that input from the camera should be recorded according to the selected schedule A schedule is set of recording characteristics that you can apply to cameras to vary their recording characteristics at different times of the day or days of the week An empty schedule called Default is provided with the plettac Sentio installation You can customise Default or create other Schedules using the Schedules tab of the Configuration Console See section 7 1 Defining Recording Schedules on page 61 for more information Whe
153. esresrrerrrerrenrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rens rinner rr nn ran 33 Associating audio input with a Camera s ssmossssessrerrrrrerrrrrerrrrrrnrerren ren rn ran 33 Specifying the audio recording quality ssmnssssssssressrssrersrrerrrerrrrr rer rrrr snar rann 34 Enabling Alarm Switch Recording sssmosmsssssrsrrsrresrrsresrrorrerrerrerrrrr ror ren rn ran 34 IP Camera CONfigUratiON sssssssssssssrrssrssarsarnn nan nn A ARR ARR ARR RAA Rn 35 the I Cameras TaD sermi a E 35 Adding IP Cameras cccccecccseecceseeceececeeeeueeesaeeceueessusesseeesaueeseeeesaaes 36 Customising IP Camera Names cccccscccceeccseceeeeceeeeeeseeseseeeeseeeeaes 37 Removing IP Camera Names cccccececeeeceeeceeeececeeeeseeeseeesaeeeeaeeees 38 Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display messsmmsresrerresresrrsrrnrrerrer rer ren nanna 38 Why disable Live Mode video display cccccsececsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Setting the Video Recording Quality ossmnssnssressrrssrssrsssrssrrrsrrerr rer rrrr rann anar 38 Previewing Video Quality osstsmessssssrssssaesssrsrrssrrenrrrrrenrrrnr rss ren r rr nr rr rr nr r norr sn 39 Specifying when a Camera should Record oocrvsnsssessessesrerrrssrrsrrrrrr rinner na 40 Setting the video recording rate minmssmssssesresrerrssrrsresrrsrrrrrrrrnn rinner ren ror ann 40 Enabling Alarm Detection cccccscccsecceeeeceeeceeecesecueeseeeesaeeseeeeeeenaes 41 Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD
154. ess networks as shown in Figure 9 9 Figure 9 9 plettac Sentio server streaming video to a Pocket PC in full screen mode 9 6 1 Enabling the Streamer Open the Options tab of the Configuration Console Figure 9 10 illustrates the Streamer panel on this tab Options Event Live Display Mode Full frame interlaced Dial U p on Alarm Single field non interlaced Streamer Network Bandwidth Limit Enable Limit M Enable Streamer Video Loss Enable Audio Alarm on Video Loss Stop Rec on Alarm Acknowledgment Figure 9 10 Enabling the Streamer option Select the Enable Streamer check box to permit users to view images via a web browser When a new user s account is established some cameras may be designated as covert By default any cam era designated as covert cannot be streamed unless you specifically permit it by selecting the Stream Cov ert Cameras checkbox For further information about covert cameras refer to section 8 4 2 Limiting the cameras a user may view on page 72 NOTE Even if a camera is currently being viewed on a device via streaming if it is designated as covert for any user and the configuration settings are updated the streamed image will immediately go blank 9 6 1 1 Address for streamed video The plettac Sentio server starts to stream video from Camera 01 by default to any client that connects to the following address using a web browser 84 19 March 2009
155. for the same camera Max 185 87 MB a eer Size 147 13 MB 05 02 57 00 31 July 2003 02 55 00 31 July 2003 IG DYD Writer Browse 03 00 57 00 31 July 2003 00 58 00 31 July 2003 06 00 57 00 31 Julv 2003 00 57 25 31July 2003 Advanced Record Selection Start Time 31 07 2008 00 57 00 End Time 31 07 2003 00 57 25 Camera og Camera 06 Add Video Audio Add Video Only r Common Options IV Add Viewer Cancel Print Export Remove From the List Figure 10 15 Export candidates automatically added by Event Review NOTE Because Video Loss Alarms by definition cannot be associated with any recorded data if you try to enqueue a video loss alarm for Export the Export utility displays the following message TN x A Ho record in the interval Figure 10 16 No record warning message This message also appears if the recordings are deleted after you ve enqueued them for Export but before the actual Export is completed 10 6 7 Deleting Events from the plettac sentio database Using the Event Review utility you can delete a selected event from the plettac sentio server s database and its association with recordings This does not delete the event related recordings themselves which remain on disk until overwritten For this reason the Delete option appears on the popup menu only when you right click the entries for events and not camera detai
156. from bottom to top as you look at the rear of the unit OROORO By default all the video inputs to your system are named in the format Camera lt CameraNum gt where lt Ca meraNum gt corresponds with the input slot number For example in a system with 16 cameras installed cameras are named Camera 01 through Camera 16 by default To customise these names for your own purposes for example to give cameras the names of areas under their surveillance use the following steps 1 Inthe Name column of the Cameras tab click on a camera name until a blinking cursor appears in the text 2 Select the camera name and overtype it with a new name 3 Use the mouse button tab key or arrow key to move to another field and make more changes 1 Click the OK button at the bottom of the Configuration Console to commit all your changes The new names you have defined for the camera s appear in the camera list and camera views NOTE Try to make your camera names distinguishable using the first 10 characters because some menus of the Configuration Console truncate them when the names are displayed 4 3 Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display By default all the cameras connected to your system are enabled for automatic display in Live mode 28 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Analogue Camera Configuration If you want to remove a camera view from Live mode click on the Enable Live toggle field until the check symbol v disap
157. gent Video Processing 76 19 March 2009 plettac FXL v4 4 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 plettac CHAPTER 9 LIve Mode Operations When you start up the plettac Sentio FXL system or connect to it using NetManager the GUI is initially in Live Mode This chapter describes the tasks that you may need to perform while the plettac Sentio GUI is in Live Mode It contains the following sections e Dial up on Alarm with NetManager e Acknowledging Alarms e Acknowledging VMD Events e Pan Tilt Zoom Functionality e Video Streamer e Optional Features in Live Mode NOTE If you are combining video recordings with transaction data from automatic teller machines or retail cash registers there are some changes to how alarms are displayed and acknowledged For further information refer to Appendix C Transaction Integration on page 173 9 1 Live Display Mode The images displayed in a camera view in Live mode can be selected as full frame or single field Full frame video presents a non interlaced image whereas the single field is an interlaced image The default setting for plettac Sentio servers is single frame To change the Live Display Mode setting select the Options tab of the Configuration console and click the required radio button Options i Live Display Mode Up L Full frame interlaced Single field non interlaced width Dirt Figure 9 1 Live Display Mode selections on the Options ta
158. h certain events can greatly reduce the amount of data to be archived The saving is dependent on the frequency of the archived or discarded events Note As you use the Configuration Console to modify these parameters you can see the effects reflected in the Capacity Including Archive field of the Archive Settings area Table 12 7 Archive parameters that affect System Capacity 12 8 4 Configuring the Archive Time Limit When you have configured Archival for one or more cameras you need to specify the time limit after which the Archive utility is to archive data The time limit you specify is the time for which all recordings are stored on disk with their original capture quality and IPS rate After this period the Archive utility processes any re cordings made from cameras for which Archive has been enabled In the Archive Settings area of the Capacity menu enter a value into the field labelled Time Before Ar chive The value can be expressed in any two of the time units shown in Table 12 8 with the following con ditions e The minimum value you can specify is 1 hour e The archive time limit can be increased in units of 15 minutes up to the maximum e Any value you specify is rounded up or down to the nearest 15 minutes e The maximum value you can specify is the total recording duration displayed at the bottom of the Recording Capacity area on the Capacity menu This is an approximation of the maximum recording duration possible with
159. h the tracks on each side and can store data on both sides The amount of data that can be stored on a DVD depends on the compression being used One of several re writeable DVD formats which provides 4 3 GB of storage and a maximum write speed of 2 5xDVD The format was designed to ensure maximum compatibility with existing DVD ROM drives and DVD Video players on both the physical and logical levels This means that a DVD R or DVD RW disc recorded in a DVD R RW video recorder can be played in virtually all DVD Video players or DVD ROM equipped PCs and that any DVD R or DVD RW disc recorded with data on a PC DVD R RW drive can be read by most DVD ROM drives It sup ports both CLV and CAV writing methods One of several re writeable DVD formats which provides 4 3 GB of storage and a maximum write speed of 1xDVD It is compatible with many PC DVD drives and consumer electronic DVD players but does not support defect management or the CAV writing format One of several re writeable DVD formats which provides 4 3 GB per side DVD RAM is used predominantly in computing because of its defect management and zoned CLV format for rapid access DVD RAM uses a wobbled groove to provide clocking data with marks written in both the groove and the land between grooves The grooves and pre embossed sector headers are moulded into the disc during manufacturing CCTV camera enclosed within a protective dome of perspex that masks the direc tion of the
160. hanging a camera s ips rate or capture quality or switching to event based recording can affect the number of days you have available to record 3 2 2 1 Storage allocation for Event Stacks The size you specify for each event stack is pre allocated from the plettac Sentio server s total storage The more storage allocated to event stacks the less is available for all other recordings on the system Figure 3 3 shows the effect increasing the event stacks has on available storage visiDprime FXL Configuration Cameras Event VMD Preview Patrol Capacity sched Enginee Log Audio Users Options SUSPIC Gs Event Stack Settings Recording Capacity Alarms Store Last 1 Camera 04 2 Camera 02 3 Camera 03 4 Camera 04 5 Camera 05 E Camera DE T Camera O7 5 Camera 08 9 Camera 09 0 Camera 10 Suspicious Alarms Store Last Archive Settings Time Before Archive h Alarm Retain VND Archive Y Suspicious Archive ov Stacked Suspicious Stacked Alarms DURATION TWW 30 Normal Discard E vent Actrvity Estimated E vent Actryity About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Event Stack Settings Alarms Store Last 1 Camera 01 2 Camera 02 3 Camera 03 4 Camera 04 5 Camera DS 6 Camera 06 T Camera OF 8 Camera 08 9 Camera 09 0 Camera 10 Suspicious Alarms Store Last Archive Settings Time Before Archive h Alarm Retain MD Archive Suspi
161. haviour to best suit your security needs and you system s storage capacity This chapter describes the factors you may need to consider when deciding how to configure the plettac Sentio FXL system s recording It contains the following sections e Planning Your Recordings e Estimating Recording Capacity e Setting a Maximum Retention Period for Recordings e Allocating Storage for Recordings 3 1 Planning Your Recordings The major problem facing managers of CCTV recording systems is managing the large amounts of video data generated Having a finite amount of storage means that you cannot record everything your cameras see and even if you could you wouldn t be able to store it for very long Finding significant events amongst attributes of recorded video data presents more problems The plettac Sentio FXL system enables you to be more discriminating in what you record and in the quality at which you record it It also applies powerful compression algorithms to the video data it captures and records In this way helps you to reduce the amount of data you need to record and makes it easier to identify signif icant events Your specific recording needs will have been discussed prior to ordering your plettac Sentio FXL system Your requirements will have determined the appropriate hardware profile for your system Before you configure the plettac Sentio system s software you need to develop a recording strategy that takes into account the
162. he cameras that are not to be viewed by the user From the list of cameras select the check box next to those cameras which are not to be seen If the user is to not view any cameras click All You can quickly de select cameras by clicking None 12 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE NOTE 8 5 8 5 1 System Administration Tasks The Flip button allows you to automatically select an alternative range of cameras For example if you have 24 cameras available 12 analogue and 12 IP and have selected cameras 1 3 5 7 9 and 15 to be covert clicking Flip will change the designated cameras to be those numbered 2 4 6 8 10 14 and 16 24 This is shown in Covert Cameras Covert Cameras OF Camera 08 Figure 8 7 Illustration of the effect of the covert camera Flip button When the user logs on to a server the Camera List of the primary GUI will only show the names of those the user is allowed to view The cameras designated as covert may be different for each user in the Standard User group When you have designated which cameras are to be covert click the Update button This saves your selec tions to the database If you click OK or Apply on the Configuration console before updating the covert cam era selections the following warning message will be displayed DYMSConfig x Covert camera settings have been changed Do you want to update Designating a camera a
163. he slider 0 for no background noise up to 10 for high background noise 3 All sound above the set threshold will activate the audio and be sent to the server audio output 2 Clicking the hand icon again will turn the auto audio off the icon will return to grey 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD Camera Sabotage Detection CSD enables the FXL server to detect whether a camera has been moved defocussed or obscured CSD is intended as a feature of a computer assisted surveillance system It is not a replacement for human operator but as a way of helping security personnel easily identify and record significant occurrences PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 125 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 On the Cameras tab of the Configuration console click in the CSD column for the cameras for which you want to enable this feature Cameras Record Time IPS Resolution Fields s Quality Alarm Enable Live Z d S SH S d d S S d P i Z PA P A A A d d d Pi A CSSS 12 4 1 Configuring a camera for CSD After you have enabled the CSD feature for a camera the fields on the CSD tab can be edited You can choose what sort of tampering you wish to consider By default all options are selected but you may choose to not worry about a particular form of tampering For example you may not need to worry about a fixed or hidden camera being moved Cameras Event nao Previe
164. how frequently NetAlert should check the status of the selected servers Extensive check period Specify the period following discovering an Alarm condition that NetAlert should alert the remote user Warnings in Server Failure panel Visual warning Check box to enable warnings to be displayed in a separate pop up window if any of the servers should fail Otherwise no popup window appears The Bell icon in the system tray changes colour to red and blinks Audio warning Check box to enable an alarm sound to be played with warning messages Table 12 4 Fields of the NetAlert Configuration dialog 12 6 3 NetAlert alarm conditions If a server being monitored creates an alert condition NetAlert triggers an Alarm The time for this to occur depends on the configured Server Check period The icon in the system tray changes colour to amber Should the alert condition not be rectified before the set Extensive check period elapses a popup screen appears if visual warning has been configured and or alarm sound if audio warning has been checked too indicating which server has a problem NetAlert Alarm E gt TI Stettler ALARM Alarm Time 17 58 10 20 01 03 Seve PLETT FESWFYZ Figure 12 17 NetAlert Alarm popup PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 131 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Clicking on the OK button closes this screen and opens the status screen Mi NetAlert EE O x Het lert Infor
165. ication or web page For further information refer to Appendix F plettac Sentio ActiveX Control on page 155 1 5 User Interfaces The plettac Sentio application suite includes the following user interfaces to suit the needs of different types of users and scenarios Interface O 2 Q c 9 2 3 uia SAs 1e uoleinbiyuog PIYJOMI2N yoeqheld Buljulid ssoa00Vy JOAIIS INA retacsemiosenercur M o o OT C Ko Cr CC pws ef ew h mbk C t Plays back only exported plettac Sentio data Table 1 2 Summary of User Interfaces and their functionality The functionality of these applications is described in greater detail in Table 1 3 on page 7 and in Chapter 2 This functionality is provided by the following suite of applications Application Description FXL Server This is the intelligent video management server IVMS that provides the core functionality of the system It performs the following functions captures video and audio inputs from cameras compresses video and audio data display video images live or playback records video and audio data serves video and audio data to networked clients live and playback export a camera s video and audio data to external media 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Application NetManager sPlayer plettac the complete solution for networked video Description Licensed client software that can connect to multip
166. ick OK to conbnue Cancel Click OK to confirm that you want to continue The message Item Deleted appears in the Status message field at the bottom of the Event Review dialog After the event record is deleted it may still be possible to review the recordings that were previously associated with it using the Playback time line 10 7 Playing Exported Video NOTE This section describes how to use the sPlayer application to play back recordings that have been exported from a plettac sentio server This section assumes that the export was made to CD or DVD media You can install and run sPlayer from your computer or run it directly from a CD or DVD If you want to use sPlayer to record from a plettac sentio server you must run it from a location where you can write data So running sPlayer from CD or DVD may not be appropriate PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 103 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 Place the CD into the disc drive and start Windows Explorer and click on the CD icon the contents should look like those shown in Figure 10 18 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 4a Back mh F Search EL Folders E SHistory Ui Ge x r EE Address g NEw Di Folders H02 15 45 00 O7 Februarv 2003 19 45 00 HH Desktop a gt mFc42 dll EI ey My Documents ee ie gt Mowawe all He My Pictures NEW D EF lt PlayerExT Er a My Computer iss visioCrypt dil ge Local Di
167. ick Select The title of the newly selected camera appears above the display panel which begins to update itself Display update can take up to 15 seconds Just before the server starts streaming the new camera view the previous camera view may appear for a second or two 9 6 4 Enabling streaming to Pocket PC clients Streaming is supported only using Windows Media Player software version 8 5 or higher on the Pocket PC 2002 or Pocket PC 2003 operating system 9 6 5 Client view of streaming Unless you are connect to the server s streaming URL as the Master Client you cannot control which cam era s images are streamed You have limited control over the way you display the images in your browser This section provides additional information about controls and usage limitations 86 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Live Mode Operations If you click on the picture with the right mouse button you display a list of options one of which is to switch to full screen mode Streaming Cameras Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back gt E P a Search STY Favorites GA Media Address http fisentiasstreamer pl E ERIE Properties Statistics More Information Camera 03 Camera 04 Select Options Error details Help About Figure 9 13 Client view of streaming 9 6 5 1 Limitations and Issues There is a time lag of typically 15 sec
168. ideo se quences associated with different types of events or with specific cameras You can then view the status of event related recordings on the disk and perform the following tasks e View them immediately in Playback e Enqueue them in Export utility e Delete them from the database Using the Event Review feature is described in the following sections e Starting the Event Review utility e Selecting Event types for display e Displaying a Summary of Events e Listing the recordings associated with an Event e Reviewing Event related recordings e Enqueueing Event related recordings for Export e Deleting Events from the plettac sentio database 10 6 1 Starting the Event Review utility To start the Event Review utility click on the icon to the left of the Playback control buttons as shown in Figure 10 8 The Event Reviewer consists of two display panes a status message field and two control buttons The left hand pane contains a tree structured list of alarms that have occurred in the plettac server s recordings 96 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playback Mode Operations The server itself is represented at the top level of the tree The right hand pane is used to display more de tailed information about alarm selections in the left hand pane Ek i x E EventDiscription 09 08 Dec 13 19 46 Suspicious 10 08 Dec 13 10 25 Alarm oof 11 08 Dec 13 10 25 Alarm a i 09 O5Dec 17 51 22 Suspicious
169. ight hand corner of the Preview window Figure 5 6 Previews of three resolutions for an IP camera Left 176x112 Centre 352x240 Right 704x480 NOTE The image received from an IP camera is used for both recording and preview If you change an IP camera s resolution from the Configuration console this will immediately be reflected in the recording 9 6 Specifying when a Camera should Record Click the Record Time field in the Recording Settings panel on the IP Cameras tab and select an option from the drop down list as illustrated below Cameras IP Cameras Jevent vo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious esp 17 IVC 1 Properties JVC 2 18 uve 2 Name 19 Empty Type VE VN C30U Version 4 3000 20 Empty IP Address 10 201 21 201 MAC Address 00 80 88 C1 26 67 21 Empty Image Settings SEN Resolution 704x480 Quality a Extended Settings 24 Empty Recording Settings 26 Empty Record Time Always IPS fi 27 Empty Enable Are NAR Archive IPS is af Ema On alarm switch 20 Empt y v Live YMD E CSD Enable Preview 29 Empty 30 Empty 31 Empty 32 Empty Add Remove About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Apply For an explanation of the Record Time options see Table 4 1 Options of the Record Time drop down list on page 30 9 6 1 Setting the video recording rate If you have specified either Always
170. ight mouse button you can enqueue e An event based recording by an individual camera e All recordings associated with an event simultaneously NOTE Even if you have previously reviewed all the associated recordings and decided that only some are worth exporting it is quicker to enqueue all of them for Export and then remove the unwanted ones from the Export utility later To enqueue a recording of a single camera associated with an event right click on the camera number in its detail view and select Enqueue for Export from the popup menu To enqueue all recordings associated with an event use the following procedure 1 Right click the Event in either pane of the Event Review utility 2 Select Enqueue for Export from the popup menu as shown in Figure 10 13 The status area shows a message to confirm that the recordings were successfully enqueued as shown in Figure 10 14 You can continue to select multiple events or individual camera recordings before opening the Export utility EventDiscription a RecStartTime RecEndTime TriggerTime AudioList of 11 09 Dec 15 38 15 Alarm 10 OS DecO3 14 38 00 09 Dec03 14 38 03 09 Dec03 14 38 02 MQ 10 09 Dec 15 38 14 Suspicious 8 OS DecO3 14 38 01 09 Dec03 14 38 05 09 DecO3 14 38 02 dB 10 09Dec 15 38 12 Suspicious 4 OS DecO3 14 38 02 09 Dec03 14 38 05 09 DecO3 14 38 02 BB 10 09Dec 15 38 12 Suspicious 1 OS Dec03 14 38 02 09 Dec03 14 38 04 09 Dec03 14 38 02 JB 10 09 Dec 15 38 11 Suspi
171. iguring ATM Integration Before starting to configure the integration of your electronic cash machines it is essential that you define two unique strings one that is recorded at the start and one that is recorded at the end each time a card is used The proprietary stand alone plettac application called AtmConfig exe is the tool for making ATM connection configuration information and ATM settings available to the plettac server NOTE AtmConfig exe does not configure your ATMs nor any connections they have with the plettac servers The application collects this information and converts it into a format that is recognised by your plettac equipment J 4 1 Multiplexor configuration When you first access the ATM configuration application the following dialog box opens Multiplexor ATM Associated COM Port COM Port Number v Bits Per Second v Data Bits _ Stop Bits Parity v Flow Control zi Line Terminator v The Number of Days before Purging Recordings 7 Md About Open Save Close Figure J 2 ATM initial configuration dialog box For each RS232 serial connection to your plettac server you must create a corresponding device entry by right clicking in the left panel of the Multiplexor tab and select New from the pop up menu Muttiplexor aT Pos r Associated COM Port COM Port Number v Bits Per Second v You must configure the setting for this device to be the sam
172. ilable in live mode so the Patrol can display 1 4 9 10 12 or 16 camera views at once In the Camera Timing area select a Time for Each Camera to be displayed on screen during the Patrol sequence This specifies the minimum time for which each camera must be displayed during the Patrol sequence In single camera layout each camera view is displayed for the specified number of seconds In multi view layouts each camera is displayed for at least the specified time but may remain on display for longer before it is replaced in the display Depending on the Patrol Type selected in step 2 different fields of the Patrol Timing area are configurable f you select a Continuous Patrol neither field is enabled f you select a one time Patrol sequence only the select a Start Patrol at field is enabled Either type in a specific start time for the Patrol or use the spinner button to modify the default start time Patrol Timing Start Patrol At 15812 Aun patrol every If you select a Periodic Patrol sequence only the select a Run Patrol every field is enabled From the drop down list select the interval that is to elapse between iterations of the Patrol sequence m Patrol Timing Start Patrol At 15 35 12 Run patrol every 15 minutes 30 minutes 7 When you are satisfied with the configuration of the Patrol click the OK button to commit the changes and close the Configuration Console If you
173. images according to the search patterns See section 11 4 Viewing Search Results for informa tion about displaying the results 11 3 1 Defining Regions of Interest ROIs SearchExpert uses ROIs to modify where it searches in an image and what sorts of changes it looks for The default setting for an ROI is the full screen area When the Draw check box is selected you can draw ROls on the screen to highlight those areas you wish to analyse De selecting the check box enables you to edit your ROIs You can move the ROI and adjust its size by using the editing handles on the ROI bounding box If any ROI overlaps another it may be difficult to edit the one that is obscured use the Browse buttons to select the ROI Clicking the Delete button deletes the currently highlighted ROI and Delete All removes all ROls An ROI may also have specialised analysis properties applied to it to enable the following if the Object Anal ysis check box has been selected e Object Tracking e Abandoned Objects e Removed Objects 11 3 1 1 Object Tracking Object Tracking mode enables you to search for when motion is detected in specific directions and speeds and for objects that fit a specific size range To search for moving objects in the recorded images click the Object Tracking radio button in the ROI Properties panel amp SearchExpert Camera O 0 71 100 Ee SEP 05 Driveway WOKINGCCTY Sensitivity 5 el dinar blind leta pe ERE
174. ime if a Pre Event period is configured for the camera PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 99 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Column Description RecEndTime Shows the time when the camera stopped recording the event TriggerTime The time when the plettac server registered the event AudioList The list of audio inputs associated with the camera Table 10 6 Details of Event based recordings NOTE The camera number displayed relates to the list of cameras that a particular user is permitted to view For example if some cameras are designated as covert the number 1 displayed in the Camera column may not refer to the same physical camera when the event is reviewed by different users Using the right hand mouse button you can perform the following operations on the listed recordings e Review them in Playback e Enqueue them for Export e Delete them from disk 10 6 5 Reviewing Event related recordings You can use the Event Review utility to quickly find and review recordings associated with events in the fol lowing ways e Reviewing all recordings associated with an events simultaneously e Reviewing an event based recording by a particular camera 10 6 5 1 Simultaneous review of all recordings associated with an Event In either pane of the Event Review utility use the right hand mouse button to click on the entry for an event as shown in Figure 10 11 Once you release the mouse button the Playback
175. ing parameters automatically set to default values of 1 IPS and Quality 4 You can modify these fields as shown to increase the intensity of this recording Cameras Event Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio prz Users Options Suspicious a Le Hame Duration Duration Output Output Duration State None Closed None Closed O OR O O 07 Cust Serv Keane ea i eee ee None 5s Closed oo ooo coed 08 Const O on 5 cosa 04 Teller 2 05 Teller3 06 Teller4 BI BRI BI RI bj hm he a a O E A a l OE EET A ESNS E E NN tere se Cases ee Pe a l a Closed SE SEn NR EN o O een toe Closed Re i tone ses RR tore ss css About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 13 Suspicious Alarm enables the Event IPS and Event Quality fields for its cameras PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 57 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 6 6 1 Termination of Suspicious alarm recording Unlike a contact alarm or VMD event a suspicious alarm cannot be acknowledged manually by an end user of the plettac Sentio server Recording continues for the duration configured for the alarm or until another oc currence of the suspicious alarm is triggered Another difference between suspicious alarms and other events is that they are not extended by successive occurrences of the event If a contact alar
176. ing the Discard scheme 12 8 5 Selecting recordings for Archive by Event type Having selected the cameras whose recordings you want to archive you can also specify which recordings from those cameras are archived by their associated event types In the Archive Settings area of the Capacity menu you can choose for each event type whether you want its associated recordings to be e Retained on disk in their original format e Archived on disk as specified on the cameras menu e Discarded altogether when the archive time limit is reached As shown in Figure 12 21 you can select a different archive scheme for recordings associated with e Contact Alarm events e VMD events e Suspicious Alarm events e No events Normal recordings Cam Event VMD Pre Patrol Capa sche Engi Log Audio Sequ Users Opt Susp cso ATM Event Stack Settings Recording Capacity J CT Space Capacity Alarms Store Last 02 CameraQ2 o 0 o Suspicious Alarms Store Last 03 CameratS aao oj wo j Archive Settings 05 Camera 05 Time Before Archive 7 Camera 07 8 Camera 08 Alarm 9 Camera 09 YMD 0 Camera 10 1 Camera 11 2 Camera 12 Stacked Suspicious Stacked Alarms DURATION Suspicious Normal 0 0 t a a a a Oo D Event Activity Estimated Event Activity m Data Protection Settings Set Data Retention Period About CLOSE
177. innnssssssssssrsrsssrsrsrsrsrsrererrrererr nr aren 9 Super VMD oomossssssssosssessossresrsrsrssrsrnrnrensnsnr rr rn rn 4 plettac server SuperArchive See archive OVEFTVIGW oismesrsrsrereserrsrsrrserrsrsrrrnesrsrererr rn rn nn l Supported CIF resolutions 31 NIV E E E EAT 4 suspicious alarm acknowledging events u 78 SIAC E 22 58 AGVANGE irepersasvarsessasdertensasssrsesdassesparks 116 termMiNatiON Lu esoss co op omm 58 82 sane nr ee eee er ner Reet eer eee 44 SUSPICIOUS alarms oo eee eseeeeeeeeeeee 55 enabling lee eee ne Dn nana 32 SVMD peered 4 enabling on IP cameras 41 abandoned object BASAR teases 120 cetaceans entrees 48 Mode 117 121 ROIS o oooorrrrrasrrsssrssrrsereserssersserserererrrer renen ann 47 object removal massera 119 volume control eseese 9 object tracking e er 118 ROT pets 121 synchronization e er 132 system clock onosnnnsssssssrsrsrsrrsrsreresenesrrrrnen rn 12 T tooltips Event Review utility 0 0 97 triggers for recording eessen 4 U T E AT EAEEREN AE TE 9 user access authentication oo eect eeeeeees 73 covert cameras seess 72 user accounts creating ooo cccecesccscsecsscsseseescseesseneens 70 dual authentication 0 0 0 73 user interface eee ner erna 6 9 utilities Event REvieW sessen 17 96 EXPO ee ene 90 101 Image Capture ou 17 95 EE ee E VERSERNA 17 95 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 185 Intelligent Video Processing plettac F
178. io tab To save on disk space click in the Quality field and use the spinner arrows to set the value to 2 which rep resents an audio sampling rate of 13 Kb per second as it is compressed using the GSM codec This provides sound quality equivalent to that of a mobile telephone For information about managing audio input in Live mode and in Playback mode see Chapter 9 Live Mode Operations on page 77 and Chapter 10 Playback Mode Operations on page 89 4 12 Enabling Alarm Switch Recording 34 With a special switch connected to the alarm input port of the plettac Sentio server you can configure a cam era to record only when this switch is activated A purpose built toggle switch is available for this purpose Press the switch once to begin recording A red light indicates that the switch is in the record position To stop recording from the camera press the switch again The light goes out Figure 4 5 shows how to enable alarm switch recording for a camera using the Record Time field of the Cameras tab Cameras Ho Hame Kae Record Time Resolution Fields s Quality Alarm VMD csp of Camera 01 F 720 x 288 single field 1 00 11 F F 02 Camera 02 wf Never single field 0 00 11 wf ai 03 Camera 03 Always 288 single field 1 00 11 m wf 04 Camera 04 Or alarm switch x 288 single field goo 11 f 7 Figure 4 5 Enabling On Alarm Switch recording for a
179. ion 6 5 Configuring Event Based Recording on page 54 for more information 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual IP Camera Configuration NOTE If you want to compare different settings of camera resolution and recording quality use the Preview feature described in section 5 5 Previewing Video Quality on page 39 The Extended Settings button accesses any special features of a particular brand and model of camera An example is shown below IP Cameras Properties r Camera 17 15 Camera 15 Name Kamera 19 h i ay j HVC N C30U Extended Settings p image Settings Aa Input Alarma I ieee Saturation 28 V Enable Shutter Speed ino 1 60 Fiat IV Auto Focus Input Alarm 1 Output Alarm PTZ Preset On Alarm 1 v Alarm State open x AIEEE a ANN RR RN Test ae PTZ Preset On Alarm 2 v Add Remove About CLOSE APPLICATION OF Cancel Apply Figure 5 4 An example of an IP camera s Extended Settings dailog Details of the IP cameras supported by your plettac Sentio server are given in Appendix Supported IP Cam eras on page 165 NOTE When you enable the Auto Focus feature for any IP camera on your network if it is also a PTZ camera the focussing button on the PTZ control panel will be disabled For further information refer to section 9 5 2 PTZ control in Live Mode on page 81 5 5 Previewing Vid
180. ion Console are displayed for all menu selections Button Function About Shows the Version information of the client application s in use and of the server to which they are connected CLOSE APPLICATION Shuts down the Application Shuts down the server and stops recording On a remote client this shuts down the NetManager application only OK Commits any changes you have made to the configuration menus and closes the Configuration Console Cancel Cancels any changes you have made to the configuration menus and closes the Configuration Console Apply Commits any changes you have made to the configuration tabs but leaves the Configuration Console open to allow you to make further changes if required Table 2 4 Function of the plettac Sentio Configuration Console buttons NOTE Avoid making changes via the primary GUI and a NetManager connection to the same server s Configuration console at the same time PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 9 Intelligent Video Processing 20 19 March 2009 plettac FXL v4 4 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 ettac SECURITY U K Ltd 2 pl CHAPTER 3 Devising a Recording Strategy When your plettac Sentio is first installed it has a default configuration that records images on all the available video input channels at all times This includes standard settings for the frequency and quality of images recorded Using the Configuration Console you can customise the system s recording be
181. ions of Interest ROIs of that camera view This provides you with the following benefits e It helps you to conserve disk space by recording at high quality and rates only when there is movement It can alert security personnel monitoring the system in Live Mode PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 45 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 e t lets you easily identify points in your recordings where there was movement on camera NOTE Before you configure VMD for a camera ensure that VMD is enabled for the camera as described in section 4 8 Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD on page 32 6 3 1 Basic VMD Configuration Full Screen To configure VMD for a camera use the following procedure 1 Open the VMD menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 6 2 Cameras Event WMD Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious m Video Motion Detection YMD Camera 03 Camera 03 Sensitivity Leva 5 Delete AOI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 2 Configuring basic VMD for a camera 2 Click the arrow to the right of the Camera field and from the drop down list select the camera for which you want to configure VMD Only cameras that have VMD enabled in the main Camera menu appear in the list Unless you define one or more Regions of Interest ROIs the VMD settings apply to the defa
182. is the string that can be searched for in any transaction record When you select the Numeric Iden tifier check box you will be able to search for vales in the range associated with the identifier custom Fieid x Friendly Name I Field Identifier J Numeric Identifier Cancel For example you might name a field as Opening Balance with an identifier defined as OpenBal If this is marked as a numeric identifier you can then search for transactions that contain for example OpenBal gt 1000 and OpenBal lt 10 000 The field identifier should also include all non white space that appears be fore the numeric information If a transaction record contains a line such as OpenBal 2540 you should define the identifier as OpenBal You can Add Remove or Edit all entries on the ATM tab except those shown in the Predefined category In addition to Numeric and String Identifier categories the ATM tab also has the Predefined category In the Predefined category you specify the following properties 1 COM Port This is the plettac servers COM Port to which the ATM is connected If one or more ATMs are connected via a multiplexor it is the multiplexor that is connected to the plettac server s COM port 2 Begin This is the first transaction line which the ATM is programmed to generate each time a card is used as described in section J 2 Programming Your ATM on page 168 3 End This is the last transaction line of
183. l the selected ATMs on your network Highlight a machine name and the right hand panel displays the current settings for that particular machine The properties of the ATM will be automatically propagated to the right hand panel of the ATM tab The terms in the left hand column under the categories Numeric Identifiers and String Identifiers are those that appear on the Search Expert interface The terms on the right are the values that you can search for and which should match the text that will be in the transaction records of your ATMs You can amend the values in the various fields in order to configure the machine by clicking in the required field and typing the changes directly or selecting from a drop down menu where appropriate iE Predefined 4 gt COH Port COMIS le NOTE In the Camera Associations field a maximum of 32 cameras can be associated with an ATM PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 171 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE NOTE 172 You can add additional identifiers that can be used as search terms in transactions Right click in right hand panels and select Add You will be prompted with a dialog box entitled Customer Field Multiplesor ATM Simulated ATM BAL Cash Balance fad dd Account Balance I CE E Predefined COM Port l ID 2 Enter a name and an identifier for the field The name will appear on the Search Expert interface and the identifier
184. ld read this DOOK cccccceeccece ence eeecececeeeceeeeeeceeseeeeeeseeesees Ix Assumed knowledge cccceccsececeecceseceeeceeeccaeecseeceuecaueceueesseeseeesseeenes Ix Typographic CONVENTIONS nssssssssesressrsrrrrrsrrsrrenrenrenr ers ren ran ren rr rr rr nr norra rn IX MOS a cee sees cere et scene wesc mie TE A E T xX Tode S aserne EE E EEE EA EEE X Related DOCUMGIMS sosoeroseosesresreranrarrerenrer renen annen rer rna Rn RAR RAKA KRKA RAR Rona X plettac the complete solution for networked video 1 Overview of plettac Sentio Sentio Server FUNCtiONS ssssssesrorerresrerra 1 plettac Network in Context missosssosssssssesrsssssrsreran ren cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeaes 2 The plettac Range of SYStOMS ccccccceeeceeeceeeecseecaeeceeeseeesaseesaeeseeees 2 Benefits of the plettac SENtiO SENtiO nessssssssessresserresresrrrrrrrrrer rer rrr ren r ror anna 3 High quality video reCOrding cccccecceecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeueeueeeeeeseeeaeeesaeeees 3 Powerful video compression ccccecceeece cece cecececseeeeeceeeseceeeeeseeseeeaeeeaes 3 Audio visual recording ou cece eecceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseesseeeseeees 3 Video Motion Detection VMD and SVMD nnsmsssssssrrssrssrrssrrsrrrnrr arr ana 4 Alarm and Event BasSed Recording sccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeneeeaeesaes 4 Camera Sabotage Detection sseosressrorresrrresrrorrrsrrrorrrrrr
185. le cameras on multiple plettac Sentio servers across a network and enable the user to e remotely monitor all of a server s video and audio inputs simultaneously display live images and play back the server s recorded data configure a server s operations with the exception of the Patrol function control any PTZ cameras connected to a server export recorded data from a server to external media A client that can connect to a sentio FXL Server and enable the user to e remotely monitor all of the server s video inputs e play back data that has been exported from the server to another storage medium CD DVD Hard Drive By exporting the sPlayer tool to the same media as your video data you can play back video and audio data from a plettac Sentio server on any Windows operating system Table 1 3 plettac Sentio Application Interfaces PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 7 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 8 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 piettac ecurity UK Limited charter 2 I he plettac User Interface This chapter provides a general overview of the Graphical User Interfaces GUIs provided by the plettac software that comes installed on your system It describes the structure and layout of the interfaces rather than the details of how to use them End use tasks are described in subsequent chapters This chapter comprises the following sections Overview of the Main Screen Displa
186. le of the group of buttons The slide bar on the top of this box indicates how far through the individual recording you are the pointer may be clicked on and dragged to move to a different position of the recording Clicking either side of the pointer will also move the recording back or forward by one frame To view the images while searching the data use the play or review buttons If you require faster viewing then use the fast forward or the rewind buttons To stop the recording to view a selected image click on either of the single frame buttons A frame number will be displayed in the view screen and on sPlayer s status box To move along the time line at a faster rate click the Real Time checkbox 10 7 1 Printing images using sPlayer To print an image from an exported recording use the following procedure 1 Playback the exported recording in sPlayer 2 Locate the image to be printed by clicking the frame advance button either of the single arrows with vertical bars An individual frame number should appear on the screen and sPlayer status box 3 Click on the Print button NOTE A printer driver must be installed and a default printer selected 10 8 Using sPlayer as a Remote Client To use sPlayer to connect to a plettac sentio server and display live video follow these steps 1 Click the Connect button and enter the Connection Properties a Select the host by name from the list or b Enter the IP address and P
187. le typing 0162 on the number key pad Use copy and paste to insert the character into the configuration interface Text overlay coordinates originate at 1 1 in the top left corner and extend to 11 rows of 28 columns Table 12 3 Sequencer text overlay control codes Once you have made your selections click the OK button to commit the configuration This resets the sequencer and applies the new settings which can take up to 30 seconds to complete 12 6 NetAlert NetAlert is an optional application that you can purchase to monitor the status of a cluster of networked plettac servers 12 6 1 Starting NetAlert Start NetAlert by double clicking the Bell short cut icon If NetAlert has been setup to start each time the PC is started then a Bell icon will already be displayed in the system tray bottom right of the screen FY Netalert ho 16 43 The Bell icon can appear in one of the following colours which indicates NetAlert s status Bell Colour Status NetAlert is initializing NetAlert is running and there are no Alerts NetAlert has detected an alert condition PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 129 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Bell Colour Status NetAlert is notifying of an alert condition 12 6 2 Configuring NetAlert 1 Double click the Bell icon to open the NetAlert status dialog NetAlert Information aa 12 59 39 17 01 03 NetAlert started Initializing Start Time 12 59 3
188. ls To delete an event follow this procedure 1 With the mouse pointer over the icon for an event either in the event tree as shown in Figure 10 9 or in the events summary in the right hand pane click and hold down the right mouse button A pop up menu appears with an entry for each of the four event types as shown in Figure 10 9 Only event types that have a tick beside their entry appear in the list Sa EventDiscription RecStartTime RecEndTime TriggerTi 09 Dec 17 57 14 Alarm 5 09 Dec03 16 18 10 09 Dec03 16 18 12 09 Dect 09 Dec 17 57 12 Suspicious 09 Dec 17 19 00 Alarm 09 Dec 17 18 59 Alarm 09 Dec 17 16 59 Alarm 09 Dec 17 16 58 Alarm 09 Dec 17 16 57 Alarm 09 Dec 17 18 10 09 Dec 17 16 59 sr ECE 09 Dec 17 16 25 YME Review 09 Dec 17 15 56 VME Engueue For Export 09 Dec 17 15 51 vM Figure 10 17 Deleting events in the Event Review utility 102 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE Playback Mode Operations 2 Move the selection to Delete and release the mouse button The utility displays the following dialog to verify your authority to delete data from the server verify User eS Uzer ane Administrator Password SS Cancel Enter your username and password and click OK 3 The utility displays the following dialog to confirm that you want to delete the Event s record from the database Delete NE Are you sure you would like to delete the event Cl
189. lso be attached Points of note 1 With the archive feature in use Playback SearchExpert and Exporting should not be attempted directly from the server NetManager should be used for these functions 2 The NetManagers and streamer should not be left in a state of continuous playback as the archival process will fall behind 3 During the archival process live playback images and audio may become jerky or even stop for a short while C 1 5 1 Archive settings when connected to both analogue and IP cameras If your plettac server is connected to a combination of analogue and IP cameras the values you can choose for the IPS of any archived recordings will vary The table below illustrates the situation where there are 16 analogue and 16 IP cameras connected to a plettac FXL If recording at high IPS rates on both 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Archiving Guidelines the analogue and IP cameras and using high quality archiving you will not be able to archive any 4CIF images Analogue ATTER u Camera 2 Max Archive IPS per IP Camera Settings Archive Recorded i Analogue Camera Quality IPS Resolution Archive IPS QCIF CIF 2CIF 4CIF Camera 25 Ee non t 13 O O i i i Ea 3 dl odlo ee 8 dl fo es a o PrP A ey Fe Ff e O EOE 3 y o oo o EEA A d dl dl o U APP e Pe O l de 0 o o Ea Cee w ese e p _ m pe r p me e 4 o eo E O i Cia 6 4 ft 0 Eee Me ia EN pa e E Le ee A CEI Kr Ga kon ee
190. m or VMD event occurs while another is active the second event extends the duration of the recording by the configured duration If a Suspicious alarm occurs while one is active it terminates the first alarm saving the recording and begins a new recording from the second trigger time For example if someone enters the lobby of a bank wearing a motorcycle crash helmet the member of staff that sees them first presses their suspicious alarm button All the cameras configured for the suspicious alarm begin recording at their configured IPS and capture quality rates Although the alarm is configured to record for 2 minutes another occurrence of the event can terminate it If for instance a second member of staff subsequently sees the motor cyclist and also presses a button the first suspicious alarm is terminated and recording starts for the second suspicious alarm No recordings are lost if this occurs but they may not be as long as the configured duration Depending on the likelihood and frequency of such multiple triggers you may decide to extend the stack size for suspicious alarms on the plettac Sentio server For more information see section 3 2 1 Protecting Event related recordings on page 22 6 7 Configuring Dial Up on Alarm You can configure the plettac Sentio server to automatically open a dial up connection to a remote client when an Alarm or other plettac Sentio Event such as Camera Sabotage or Video Loss occurs You can
191. m these tasks using the sBDA Control Console in Live mode shown in Figure 12 11 These tasks are described on page 125 es 3 Figure 12 11 The Bi Directional Audio Control Console 12 3 2 Opening the microphone manually for sBDA In Live mode you can speak to someone via the plettac server using sBDA If Bi Directional Audio has been enabled for your client the sBDA Control Console is displayed at the bottom of the screen Click the microphone icon and hold down the mouse button While the icon is clicked it changes colour to magenta and sBDA output is active Any sound picked up by the attached microphone is transmitted to the audio output channel regardless of any auto audio threshold setting When you release the mouse button the microphone is closed again unless you have configured an auto audio threshold Figure 12 12 Two way conversation using Bi directional Audio 12 3 3 Setting Auto Audio and Background Noise level The auto audio function enables NetManager users to address people using the sBDA feature without hav ing to click a mouse button on the microphone icon of the NetManager To configure this feature open either the sBDA Control Console or use the sBDA controls from the Live mode of NetManager or plettac server GUI 1 Click the hand icon to activate the auto audio function the icon will change colour to purple 2 The Threshold slider will now be available Set the background normal level of noise by using t
192. m your plettac sentio server you should pause Playback to avoid adversely affecting system performance If you must continue playing back recordings on the server you are recommended to use NetManager to control any export In Playback mode click the Export button on the Playback console You will be prompted to enter a pass word if password protection has been configured for Export The export dialog opens as shown in Figure 10 2 There is a short delay in startup while the system searches for valid export devices The plettac server automatically detects local hard drives network drives CD and DVD writer drives and displays them in the Target drop down list Max 150 78 MB QAPALFAL Size 1 51 MB 01 03 46 00 23 November 2004 08 46 10 29 November 2004 AY Browse 01 03 50 00 23 Novermber 2004 08 50 10 29 November 2004 AY Advanced Record Selection Start Time 2971172004 13 1209 End Time 29711 2004 13 12 09 Camera Jor Camera 01 v Add Output Format C Wavelet Files Windows Media Format Files C AMI Files C DVD Video for playback on DVD players Figure 10 2 The Export dialog 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playback Mode Operations 10 3 1 1 Elements of the Export Dialog Element Description Fields of the Target panel Target Drop down list that contains the valid CD DVD and local hard drives detected by the Export utility The number and types of targe
193. mages according to the search patterns The Merge radio button displays all the results for all the selected cameras whereas choosing Intersect will find only those time periods when all selected cameras have a search result For example you might have three cameras showing different views of a car park and might want to only find movement that all three cameras recorded See section 11 4 Viewing Search Results for information about displaying the results I gt WARNING When a search is started CPU utilisation rises to 100 Avoid performing any other tasks on the plettac sentio server whilst the search is in progress 11 3 Advanced Motion Search SearchExpert s Advanced Motion Search allows you to perform precise searches by searching more images when available looking for events such as movement in a particular direction or whether an object of a particular size has either been removed from the scene or added to it Before adding a camera to the Camera Selection list you need to select the Advanced radio button in the Motion Search panel and then define regions of interest ROIs and assign search properties to them PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 109 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Once you have configured your search parameters for a camera click Add to move it to the Camera Selec tion list Click the Search button when you have added all the cameras to be searched SearchExpert searches the recorded
194. maieonnatenesiens 94 DVD burner essees 94 SPINO e E ee inst 7 live display o oo 106 playing exported video 103 printing exported images 106 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual stack vV AA secorre ie i NSI 22 Protection override m 25 video TA 24 COMPFESSION oo 1 3 SUSPICIOUS alarm uw wee 22 58 US a I 147 stacked events um 98 motion detection nee 4 Still image capture Lemne 95 Playing eXP rtS mossen 103 still images record time nossssssssesrsssssesererernrnrnenn 29 40 CAPTULING NN 17 recording quality 30 32 38 39 storage recording rate oo 29 30 40 allocating disks mmmmnmnnnnnn 26 recording Strategy 21 capacity eee cccccssesssessseceseesseceseeeseeenees 23 retention oosssssssssrsssrrsrersrsrrsrsrsrrnesrs enn rne nn 5 de allocating disks 26 UGS dosssrsebeds rr etre anrereen cies 13 NN San 26 VIDEO INPUTS 0 eee tees teeeeseeeenees 147 148 Storage SYSTEMS ereer 1 PNG cece cece echoes 147 streamed video video motion detection VMD 4 ActiveX sssr 155 video motion detection See VMD Windows Media Player c e 83 video streamer ousseessnssssrsrsrssesrsrsrerseserrnrrnen rn enn 84 SUTCAMEL cee eccececcescsecesseccsseessecesseessevessesesseeesees 83 video loss alarm ACIdfBSS rococo ooo esc 84 ALONG eee nee eee ener 53 master client s 00 86 video loss alarms oeseri 52 summary of events oo 98 plettac GUI
195. mation Net lert Lag 12 19 53 20701703 Alarm acknowledged 12 18 47 20 01 02 Status changed to Alarm Servers PLETT FESWPY 12 19 47 20 01 03 PLETT FESWPY2 status changed to LARM Alarm start Time 11 56 54 20701703 Server Count 2 Configure Met amp lert Server Information 12 17 34 20 01 02 Status changed to Warming Servers PLETT FESWEYZ 1212 31 20 01 03 Status changedtoOK Last Check Start Time PLET I 4 OF 12 20 32 20701703 10 02 57 207 01 03 3 3 1 O PLETT FESWPY2 Alarm 12 16 31 20701703 12 11 48 20701703 3 3 1 1 Figure 12 18 NetAlert Alarm Status screen A log of the alarms and actions taken will be displayed in the NetAlert Log panel The server that triggered NetAlert displays Alarm in the status column When the alarm condition is rectified the status is automatically reset to OK 12 6 4 Audio Only alerts When configured to audio warning only the alarm details can be checked by clicking with the right mouse button over the blinking red bell icon in the system tray This will give three options e Open the NetAlert main dialog e Access the Configuration dialog e Acknowledge the alarm i INFORMATION For audio alert to work you must have a sound or a sounds theme associated with error events on your PC This is configurable from the Sounds Menu of the Control Panel 12 6 5 NetAlert on Older Servers Any plettac servers running software prior to 3 1 will be available fo
196. mera view you must first double click that tile to switch to single camera view 4 Click on the Image Capture button the camera button changes from black to pink and as the image is captured the camera appears to flash The capture utility saves the images temporarily to the directory C dvms img_ captured in Windows bitmap format and automatically enqueues them for Export For information about using the Export utility see section 10 3 Exporting Recordings on page 90 As can be seen in Figure 10 7 each image is named according to the camera view from which it is captured and the date and time at which it was originally recorded by the plettac server PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 05 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 5 Start the Export Utility to write the captured images to a writeable medium such as CD or DVD Once you exit the Export utility all the captured bitmaps are deleted regardless of whether you complete the Export or cancel it before exporting the bitmaps NOTE If you do not export the captured images they remain in the img captured directory until you next start the Export utility or until they are overwritten Once the img captured directory contains 51MB of data the image capture utility begins to overwrite the oldest bitmaps B C dyms img_captured H a x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Back J 7 gt p Search if Folders gt S x ig
197. mes but with a low ips constant recording as well You can configure different schedules interior and exterior cameras that you can apply to cameras to quickly implement your specific recording strategy This chapter describes how to configure recording schedules in the plettac Sentio server and then apply them to record from cameras connected to the server It contains the following sections e Defining Recording Schedules e Applying Schedules to Cameras 7 1 Defining Recording Schedules Using the Schedules tab of the Configuration Console you can save a scheduled set of recording charac teristics that you can apply to cameras to make the server modify how it records from these cameras depend ing on the time of the day or the day of the week For example you may want the camera s covering the lobby of your building to record constantly during normal business hours Outside business hours however you may want them to automatically switch to event based recording Figure 7 1 below shows an example of a recording schedules that could be applied to cameras on your premises Cameras Event vo Preview capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio ptz Users Options Suspicious csp l Selection Weekday New Schedule Edit Schedule Delete Schedule m Interval M TWTheE SS Start End IPS Quality Alarm YMD rrreerr og frog FJ ff z r Delete Interval New Interval Time line 00 01 O02 OS 04
198. mum IPS Rate for Cameras set to 4CIF IPS Rate ee Remaining Cameras PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 31 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Maximum IPS Rate for Cameras set to 4CIF IPS Rate Remaining Cameras 4 7 Enabling Alarm Detection The plettac Sentio server can accept input from external alarm systems via ports at the rear of the unit You can associate an alarm event with a particular camera so that the frame of its camera view turns red when ever the alarm occurs Examples of alarm events could be the opening of a door the raising of a car park barrier or the operation of a turnstile To enable Alarm detection for a camera click the Alarm field until a check symbol appears This enables the system to receive alarm signals that are associated with the camera view Further configuration is required on the Event tab of the Configuration Console To reduce the amount of data recorded on disk you can configure the plettac Sentio server to record from cer tain cameras only when alarm events occur See section 6 4 Associating Alarms with Cameras on page 49 for more information 4 8 Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD To enable Video Motion Detection VMD for a camera click the VMD field until a check symbol appears This enables the system to detect movement in the objects within a camera view Further configuration is required on the VMD tab of the Configuration Console See section 6 3
199. n a Schedule is selected all the columns to the right of Record Time are disabled Table 4 1 Options of the Record Time drop down list Setting the Video Recording Rate If you have specified either Always or On alarm switch in the Record Time column of the Cameras tab the IPS field becomes active IPS stands for Images Per Second and specifies the rate at which images captured from each camera are recorded to disk To modify the recording rate click in the camera s ips field and use the spinner arrows on the right hand side to either increase or decrease the recording rate With the plettac Sentio FXL system you can record up to 50 ips across all cameras attached to your system You can record at up to 25 ips from an individual camera but you must configure your recordings from other cameras within the system maximum The Total column shows the percentage of the capture rate that the settings of each camera utilise The sum at the bottom of the column may show a value greater than 100 percent but if you click OK or Apply a warn ing message similar to that shown in Figure 4 2 is displayed If the warning message includes the text Reduce in interval on Monday at 00 01 it indicates that you do not have any schedules defined and that you need only adjust the settings on the Camera tab or Event tab If you have defined any Schedules the warning message will indicate the interval where the maximum is first exceeded For furth
200. n and moving it forward and back controls the tilt function Zoom control is effected by twisting the joystick handle NOTE The Options tab has a check box which allows you to change the direction of the tilt movement on the joystick You can either choose to have the camera tilt up when the joystick is moved up or to have the joystick have a flight simulator style motion where stick forward up means camera down The change takes effect the next time you click the PTZ button The check box is illustrated in Figure 9 8 Engineering Log audio Sequencer PTZ Users Options suspiciou Joystick Movement Event Dial Up on Alarm streamer Network Bandwidth Limit Enable Streamer Enable limit Figure 9 8 Joystick vertical orientation check box on the Options tab Camera presets designating a particular camera position can be recalled by pressing a button Store a preset by holding a button down for three seconds When a button is pressed the colour of the corresponding button on the PTZ control panel of the GUI changes to mauve 96 Video Streamer With the Streamer feature the plettac Sentio server can stream video across a network to clients that connect using web browsers PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 83 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Streaming can support up to 8 simultaneous clients which can be PCs connecting via fixed networks or Pocket PCs connecting via wirel
201. n the video recording associated with the audio is accelerated paused or played in reverse PTZ This abbreviation appears in green in the top right hand corner only while you are adjusting the PTZ controls for the camera The Pan Tilt Zoom control feature must be enabled on the server Table 2 1 Text and graphic indicators in Camera Views 2 2 1 1 Full Screen Display Area By clicking anywhere on the Display Area with the right mouse button you can hide the menu area on the left of the main screen and expand the display area to fill the entire screen Clicking a second time with the right mouse button restores the menu area and reverts to the previous window layout system Clock The system clock always shows the current date and time setting of your system in Live mode and Playback mode In Playback mode the time at which images and sounds were captured is displayed by another clock at the bottom of the screen Refer also to Appendix H Recordings during Summer Winter Daylight Saving Changes on page 163 Mode Selection Buttons Use these buttons to select the operations mode of the GUI Currently active modes are displayed in mauve text Live mode is the initial mode when you start up the application The mode the application is in before you activate Supervisor mode remains active while you are using the configuration interface Live mode and Playback mode cannot be active at the same time The Live Button Click this bu
202. nager in Playback mode This chapter describes the tasks that you can perform while using the plettac GUI in Playback Mode It con tains the following sections e Accessing Playback e Locating Alarm and VMD Events e Exporting Recordings e Printing Images in Playback Mode e Capturing Images in Playback Mode e Playing Exported Video e Using sPlayer as a Remote Client The basic operations of Playback are described in section 2 10 Playback Console on page 15 If you are combining video recordings with transaction data from automatic teller machines or retail cash registers there are some changes to the way Playback operates and to what is displayed on screen For further information refer to Appendix C Transaction Integration on page 173 Accessing Playback If your system administrator has configured password protection for Playback mode you may need to enter your password to use this feature 10 2 Locating Alarm and VMD Events NOTE VMD events and External Alarms appear as colour coded vertical lines in the Playback time line Depend ing on the frequency with which such events occur the lines that represent them may be spaced out or may form contiguous blocks If there are long periods of time between the events that you wish to review you do not need to review all the recorded images between them You can use the event locator buttons to jump forward or back to the next event in the time line
203. nd Event Quality fields use the drop down lists to select values that specify the recording rate and quality you want the server to record from the camera associated with the event It is possible to set Event IPS to less than the standard ips rate However events are recorded at the higher of the two ips rates In Figure 6 11 below several of the cameras have been set to record at the maximum rate of 25 ips and at quality 1 It would require far too much disk space to record constantly at these levels 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording However when triggered by an event recording with these settings gives you have an increased chance of recording significant action and the recorded images are of better quality 1 1 Cameras Event Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious Hame Suay puen Duration Output Paris State Camera 01 5s Change of State _ None Closed 2 Camera 02 fs all Closed T 5s Closed Closed T 5s Closed Closed Closed Closed 5s Closed Closed Closed Closed 5s Closed Closed 5s Closed Camera 03 Camera 04 Camera 05 Camera 06 Camera OF Camera 08 About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 11 Configuring event based recording for a camera 2 In the Even
204. nes the type of data that appears in the right hand pane 98 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playback Mode Operations A click with the left mouse button on the server icon at the top of the tree populates the right hand pane with a detailed summary of all events listed in the left hand pane as shown in Figure 10 10 I EventReview x 05 De w YMD 05 De y Alarm 05 De y Suspicious Alarm 05 De y Video Loss Suspicious Alarm Alarm video Loss video Loss video Loss 05 Dec 16 14 22 05 Dec 16 14 22 05 Dec 16 14 21 05 Dec 16 14 21 05 Dec 15 13 27 05 Dec 15 13 27 Video Loss 05 Dec 14 29 02 Video Loss 05 Dec 16 20 22 YMD 05 Dec 16 20 05 YMD 05 Dec 16 19 53 YMD 05 Dec 14 21 37 Video Loss 05 Dec 14 21 36 Video Loss 05 Dec 14 05 38 Suspicious 05 Dec 14 05 24 Video Loss 05 Dec 14 05 24 Video Loss 05 Dec 13 51 57 Suspicious 05 Dec 13 51 47 Alarm 05 Dec 13 51 47 Alarm 05 Dec 13 51 46 Video Loss 05 Dec 13 29 02 Video Loss 05 Dec 13 20 22 VMD M4 Ner 22 11 48 Figure 10 10 MD v Status gt alarmInput TriggerTime Acktime type Carmeratist tad 05 DecO3 17 51 22 05 Dec03 16 17 16 05 Dec03 16 17 18 05 Dec03 16 17 18 05 Dec03 16 17 17 05 Dec03 16 17 17 05 Dec03 16 14 36 05 Dec03 16 14 22 05 Dec03 16 14 22 05 Dec03 16 14 21 05 Dec03 16 14 21 05 Dec03 15 13 27 05 Dec03 15 13 27 05 Dec03 14 29 02 05 Dec03 14 29 02 05 Dec03 14 21 38 05 Dec03 14 21 38 05 Dec03 14
205. ng It can then pass the alarm as output to a switch that turns on a red light to draw the attention of operators who might otherwise be distracted The number of alarm outputs is limited by the number of alarm ports at the back of your server Because each alarm port block can have only 1 alarm output the maximum available outputs is 4 Using the following procedure you can configure the plettac Sentio server to output an alarm when it receives alarm input from an external source PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 51 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 1 On the Event menu click in the Alarm Output field for the camera and select an alarm output from the drop down list as shown in Figure 6 8 The default setting is None Cameras Event Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious tame L WS omms owman owen ow oie ouput Oupa aon Sene Hame Duration Duration Output Output Duration State 01 Camera 01 Closed Closed 02 Camera 02 Closed Closed 03 Camera 03 Closed Closed 04 Camera 04 05 Camera 05 06 Camera 06 None Closed re I Closed None Closed Output 01 ee Closed Output 02 doo E BI BI E E RI BIR Closed Closed Closed Closed 07 Camera OF 08 Camera 08 DDD DDD HD DH About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 8
206. ng Video Loss output alarms You can configure the plettac Sentio server to output an alarm if it stops receiving video input from a camera using the following procedure 52 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording 1 On the Event menu click in the Video Loss Output field for the camera and select an alarm output from the drop down list as shown in Figure 6 9 The default setting is None NOTE Depending on how you ve configured and used external alarm outputs you may decide to configure all Video Loss alarms on one alarm output or to distribute them across different outputs Cameras Event Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious csp Be O e e a e Hame Duration Duration Output Output Duration State 10s 10s Closed None 5s Closed 40s 10s Closed None Closed 10s 10s Closed None Closed 10s 10s Closed None Closed 108 10s Closed None Closed 10s 10s Closed None Closed 10s 10s closed None Closed 10s 10s Closed Output 03 Closed 10s 10s Closed None Closed 10 Camera 10 10s 10s Closed None Closed 11 Camera 11 10s 10s Closed None Closed 10s 10s Closed None 45 Closed 03 WII WII LW WII OO Oo Oo wi wi wi a 12 Camera 12 About CLOSE APPLICATION
207. ng in the wind By defining one or more Regions of Interest ROIs in the ROI Drawing Area you can apply VMD only to areas of the camera view in which movement is significant and avoid areas that are prone to random motion To configure VMD for a camera with Regions of Interest use the following procedure 1 Open the VMD menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 6 4 Cameras Event WMD Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious Video Motion Detection YMD Camera 03 Camera 03 Md Sensitivity Level pu 25 Delete ROI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 4 Drawing a VMD Region of Interest for a camera PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 47 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE 6 3 3 NOTE 48 2 Select the camera for which you want to configure VMD from the drop down list of cameras Only cameras that have VMD enabled in the main Camera menu appear in the list 3 Position your mouse cursor in the area of the image where you want an ROI Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner of the ROI The ROI appears as a yellow rectangle When satisfied with the size of the ROI release the mouse button You cannot adjust the size or shape of an ROI once you have drawn it You must delete it and draw it again 4 Click the Start Test button to tes
208. ng schedule 1 Open the Schedules tab of the Configuration Console 2 Click the Edit Schedule button A menu list of available schedules appears Select the schedule you want to amend and the schedule s intervals are displayed Cameras Event vmo Previews Capacity Schedules Engineenna tog audio Users Optons Suspicious cso Selection Weekday New Schedule Edt Schedule Delete Schedule thera MT WThFSS Start End rrrrrrr fos 00 jiso Delete Interval New Interval 3 Select the interval you wish to edit The interval will be highlighted with a white border If you want to edit more than one of the schedule s intervals Ctrl click on the required intervals 4 Enter the amended start and end times ips and quality rates select the days on which the interval is to apply and also whether the recording is to be event based by selecting Alarm or VMD or both 5 Click the New Interval button The message shown below will be displayed if the new period overlaps an existing interval 2 There are overlaping schedule items Click Ok to delete old items Click Cancel to retain existing schedule Cancel Click OK to replace existing intervals with your new intervals 6 Click OK on the Schedules tab to save the changes and close the Configuration console If you want to delete a schedule click Delete Schedule and select the name of the schedule you no longer require Cameras Event
209. nger by further compressing them with very slight loss in quality Before configuring archiving you must refer to Appendix C Archiving Guidelines on page 143 for information about the restrictions associ ated with your system For example you can greatly reduce the size of recorded data by removing colour data and archiving it in black and white With the Dynamic Re Archive option you must specify a system wide time limit after which the system automatically archives the recordings of any cameras for which archiving is configured Images are stored on disk in uncompressed format until the time limit is reached when they are automatically stored in archived format Each individual camera s configuration determines whether or not the server archives its recordings and how much compression is used 12 8 1 Configuring Archive for a camera s images If you have purchased a system with the Dynamic Re Archive option the Preview tab contains additional fields with which you can specify which cameras recordings the server should archive and what level of compression and quality it should use To configure archiving for a camera use the following procedure 1 Select the Preview tab of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 12 19 2 Select the Enable Archive checkbox to activate the Archive Settings panel Archive Settings J Enable archive Archive IPS Archive Quality Preview archive Figure 12 19 Configuring Ar
210. ngs x Full Screen Display Properties Change Full Screen Resolution to Colour Depth 16 Bit 32 Bit Resolution f 800 600 10242 Be f 1280 1024 TCP Record Path cdma Text Colour cea Figure 10 21 sPlayer Settings dialog This dialog box enables you to select the playback screen properties to suit your graphics adapter and mon itor capabilities in full screen mode Click the Text Colour button to select the colour used to display text at the bottom of the screen You don t need to click the OK button for this selection to take effect Use the Display drop down list to select from five screen sizes in which to view the images By double click ing on the playback screen image the screen will switch to full screen mode to revert to the original size double click again The status box displays the current sPlayer status play fast forward single frame rewind and reverse This information is also overlaid on the display screen If the recorded images were in ALARM and or VMD this text will be displayed on the right hand side the alarm text will be red and the VMD text will be in yellow PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 105 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 During replay the box shows an individual frame number as well as date and time To navigate to an individ ual frame click on the single frame button these are the single arrows with a vertical bar in the midd
211. nications pro tocol that manages the end to end delivery of data across a network The TCP layer manages the splitting up of a message or file into smaller packets The IP layer handles the addressing of each packet to ensure it gets to the right destina tion where the TCP layer resembles the packets into the original message UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply A device that enables your computer to keep run ning for at least a short time when the primary power source is lost It also provides protection from power surges VMD Video Motion Detection Feature of plettac Sentio FXL that can be configured to detect movement in the picture captured by a stationary camera and trigger an event that is logged by the system and can be used to trigger recording See also SVMD 180 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 v plettac Security UK Limited Index PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 A abandoned object SVMD eoar E 120 access DAMING srcennernecnra eo 74 CORU ON Sccaenandnesaccanninenewmenence 73 password protected u 75 POK A A en TE nn OTe 99 acknowledgement stopping recording essees 60 suspicious alarm seess 58 acknowledging events ccc 99 ActiveX control eseese 155 example oosoesesssssrsrssesesrsrsrrseresrsnenenr nn nr nn 157 POOISWATION cecesecseciecsersscercserssesdeercsecaseaes 157 Adding an IP camera ou cece 36 alarm configuration oeer 115 GUIEAWIONY aporia 60 g 0 Caer een en
212. nt 1000 When there are more than 1000 VMD events in the database the following message appears in the status field when the list is updated More data exists Items retrieved limited to avoid overload 10 6 2 1 Event types Table 10 4 shows the icons that the Event Review uses to denote the type of event associated with a video sequence and to indicate whether it is still in the protective stack configured for events of that type Event eee Icon Stacked Description Type Contact aih Denotes recordings triggered by alarm contact switches a Alarm eae connected to the server s Alarm ports A red stack icon appears beside the event if it is still in the stack configured for the event type Suspicious jiii Denotes recordings triggered by staff members pressing Alarm ales suspicious alarm buttons connected to the server s Alarm ports A purple stack icon appears beside the event if it is still in the stack configured for the event type VMD Event Denotes recordings triggered by a motion corresponding to the VMD configuration for that camera view Video Loss Denotes the loss of video input from a camera By definition no Alarm recordings can be associated with such alarms but it may be useful to see when these alarms are acknowledged CSD Events Table 10 4 Icons used to signify the type of an event and whether it is stacked 10 6 3 Displaying a summary of Events The selections you make in the left hand pane determi
213. nu Field Description Camera This selects which camera Serial communications port Each PTZ camera to be integrated must be configured on a port Select the COM3 port and click the button labelled Configure Port The PTZ Port Settings dialog appears as shown in Figure 9 5 on page 81 Choose the protocol that matches the camera manufacturer ID This is the hardware identification number assigned to the camera Table 9 1 Fields of the PTZ configuration dialog NOTE It may not be possible to use the Configure Port button to specify the port for PTZ cameras An alternative method is to use the Device Manager under System Hardware in the Windows XP 80 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Live Mode Operations Control Panel COM1 Properties I 21 Port Settings Bits per second ESIN Data bits je o Parity None o Stop bits iti wt Flow control None o Restore Defaults cea Figure 9 5 PTZ com port settings dialog Enter appropriate options for the system being used and click on the OK button It is not necessary to press the Apply button first as the OK button applies any changes 9 5 2 PTZ control in Live Mode With the PTZ Control Console open select the camera you want to control by selecting it for full screen display in the main GUI The currently selected PTZ camera has the PTZ label superimposed over its image and the camera name appears in the PTZ Control con
214. of each camera view This can either be in the default form Camera 01 or a user defined name If there is no input from the camera or if no camera is connected at this slot on the card the message No Input is displayed in grey If you configure the application to start with the DT command line option the plettac Sentio displays the date and time of video capture at the bottom of each camera view in both Live and Playback modes plettac Sentio displays the abbreviation REC in red in the top left hand corner of the camera view when it is recording that camera s input Normally the frame of each camera view is black When an alarm associated with a camera is activated the frame changes to red When a VMD alert occurs the frame changes to yellow When the plettac Sentio server detects a configured VMD event in a particular camera s view it displays the message VMD Ack in yellow in the bottom right hand corner of the camera view A speaker icon appears in the top right hand corner of the camera view if audio input has been associated with the camera The speaker appears in mauve when audio input is active The speaker appears crossed out and in dark grey when audio input has been explicitly muted for this camera view 19 March 2009 1 1 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 2 2 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 12 Indicator Meaning In Playback mode the speaker appears in dark grey but unobscured whe
215. ollowing is an example of a transaction 001 TRANSACTION BEGIN 001 19 11 03 13 54 O01 RECEIPT 0075 001 CARD NO 440647010929 001 ACC 10929001640 OUL CHEQUES DEPOSIT OO1 TRANS NO 077 001 TRANSACTION END where 001 is an address added by a multiplexor See Configuring ATM Integration on page 169 Here TRANSACTION BEGIN can be used as an identifier to identify the start of the transaction where TRANS ACTION END can be used as the end of the transaction identifier 168 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual ATM Integration J 3 Making ATM and Multiplexor Settings Available Your ATMs may be connected directly or indirectly to one of your plettac server s COM ports In the latter case several ATMs are connected to the system via a multiplexor A multiplexor terminates a transaction line using a defined line terminator The following information must be made available to IVMS 1 Transaction line terminator 2 Serial communication settings of ATM if connected directly to IVMS or the multiplexor if ATMs are connected to IVMS via the multiplexor 3 transaction start line identifier 4 transaction end line identifier 5 ATM address if multiplexor is used and or if an ATM itself is programmed to generate the address preceding each transaction line The above information must be made available to IVMS by using the ATMConfig application as described in the following sections J 4 Conf
216. olour images reduced to between 30 and 60 of original size depending on the original quality Black amp White Colour information is discarded reduced to between 50 and 80 of original size depending on the original quality As ls Quality of archived images is maintained The higher the quality of the original images the more scope there is for compression Table 12 6 Archive Quality settings 12 8 2 Previewing Archive quality If you have purchased a system with the Dynamic Re Archive option you can preview how images will appear following archiving by clicking the Preview Archive button i INFORMATION Preview Archive lets you verify that recordings will still be of evidential quality following any compression 12 8 3 How Archive can extend system capacity When the Archival command line option is used to enable Dynamic Re Archive the Archive Settings area of the Capacity menu becomes active At the bottom of the Archive Settings area is a field labelled Capacity Including Archive which is filled automatically by the plettac server The system s recording capacity is expressed in units of time using the two most significant units of time For example with the current configuration the system would begin to overwrite its recordings in 2 000 000 seconds the system capacity would be expressed as 3W 2D Table 12 8 on page 136 explains the symbols used to display the units of time displayed in this field i INFOR
217. olumn are headings for the following totals e subtotal of all cameras recordings e the contact alarms stack e the suspicious alarms stack e the total capacity of the system Duration The minimum recording time available to the camera This represents the time it would take to replay all of the cameras recordings using playback This is a very conservative estimate based on the constant occurrence of trigger events for all cameras configured for event based recording The actual amount of recording from this camera held on disk will most likely be greater as in reality recording triggers do not occur 100 of the time If a camera is configured to record Never this cell of the table is left blank Space The amount of disk space that the that the recording in the Duration column would consume The units adjust themselves automatically to the order of magnitude Capacity The percentage of the plettac Sentio server s total allocation of disk space that the recording in the Duration column would consume Table 3 1 Columns of the Recording Capacity table PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 23 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 If you modify any aspects of camera configuration that would impact hard disk usage on the Camera Event Schedule or Suspicious Alarm menus you can see these changes reflected in the columns of the Record ing Capacity table before you press OK to commit them In this way you can test how a c
218. on disk Figure 3 1 shows the Capacity menu of a system in which some of the 12 cameras are associated with alarms and suspicious alarms Cam Event VMD Pre Patrol Capa sche Engi Log Audio Sequ Users Opt susp CSD ATM Event Stack Settings r Recording Capacity TT seace Capacity Alarms Store Last 101 Camera 01 5 46GB 8 02 Camera 02 0 Suspicious Alarms Store Last 03 Camera 03 1 37GB 5 46GB Archive Settings z 5 4668 5 4665 5 4665 349 57MB Alarm Archive Y 5 0 YMD Archive 5 46GB 5 46GB 5 46GB 5 46GB 5 46GB 2 73GB Event Activity 5 4668 Stacked Suspicious 0 Estimated Event Activity Stacked Alarms 453MB DURATION 1D Time Before Archive D Suspicious Archive v Normal Archive v m Data Protection Settings l Set Data Retention Period About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Apply Figure 3 1 The Capacity tab of the Configuration Console If you have cameras configured to record only when Alarms or VMD events occur or to record more inten sively with higher ips rates and better quality when such events occur this will increase the total number of days that can be stored on the system This benefit is most pronounced when the events are not likely to occur very often but if they occur very often event based cameras naturally must record more often The Capacity
219. onds in the stream of video images to Pocket PC devices No audio data is streamed If the user of the Master Client changes the camera view being streamed the pictures are updated on your display but the title showing the camera number above the display may not update itself automatically If you notice that the picture has changed and want to know the camera number reconnect to the server with your browser to update the title If the Master Client disconnects then the first client changing the camera number or connecting becomes the master NOTE If you would like to write your own streaming application an ActiveX control for the plettac server is available For more information see Appendix F plettac ActiveX Control on page 155 9 7 Optional Features in Live Mode If you are using any of the following product options the GUI contains additional elements in Live mode e Super VMD See section 12 1 7 SVMD in Live Mode on page 123 e Bi Directional Audio See section 12 3 2 Opening the microphone manually for sBDA on page 125 e NetAlert See section 12 6 3 NetAlert alarm conditions on page 131 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 87 Intelligent Video Processing 88 19 March 2009 plettac FXL v4 4 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 2g bk lettac ecurity UK Limited charter 10 Playback Mode Operations NOTE 10 1 You can review recorded data using the sentio FXL server s GUI or NetMa
220. ontrol console of the server shown in Figure 11 2 fie xas JN AQ E ce DE EEE Figure 11 1 SearchExpert button on the NetManager interface EVENT z DATE aa gt e 21 15 for 07 2004 gt Pere DN OOO aa lax Figure 11 2 SearchExpert button on the server Playback control console If no server connections have been established using NetManager if you access SearchExpert from the Net Manager interface the camera list will be blank If there are server connections all the connected cameras will appear in the camera list in the following format Camera number camera name server name NOTE The camera list is dynamically updated If you remove a server or camera from the connection it PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 107 Intelligent Video Processing i INFORMATION NOTE 108 plettac FXL v4 4 will automatically be removed from the SearchExpert camera list Motion Search Camera e eel 40 100 09 Camera 09 QAPALFXL m Sensitivity J 1 1 1 4 1 i 1 a _ Quick Rate Gxi eo C x4 C Advanced ROI Properties 0 20 80 100 MM Motion 7 Size ee leon F Object Analysis 0 30 70 100 Object Tracking F Speed pe a ee ee ee ee Abandoned Objects Removed Objects Direction Time Selection Result Merge Intersect Specify Times Use Result Times Camera Date Time start 15 09 2004 09 27 2541 4 g
221. or On alarm switch in the Record Time field you can also specify the IPS rate IPS stands for Images Per Second and specifies the rate at which images captured from each camera are recorded to disk To modify the recording rate click in the IPS field of the IP Cameras tab and select from the available options in the drop down list to set the recording rate The number of images per second that can be captured by an IP camera is not affected by the limitations of the direct analogue connections to a plettac server The only limitations are from the processing power of the plettac Sentio server and the available bandwidth of the network to which it is connected 40 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 6 4 5 6 5 IP Camera Configuration If the warning message includes the text Reduce in interval on Monday at 00 01 it indicates that you do not have any schedules defined and that you need only adjust the settings on the Camera tab or Event tab If you have defined any Schedules the warning message will indicate the interval where the maximum is first exceeded For further information about schedules refer to Chapter 6 on page 43 To minimise disk space usage set a low or zero ips rate for constant recording Always and use event based recording to trigger a higher ips rate when an event occurs However the system calculates the maximum potential ips that the combined event based settings req
222. ors can also be used to connect some monitors which increases the accuracy of the signals sent from the video adapter CCTV Closed Circuit Television A television system in which signals are not publicly distributed cameras are connected to television monitors in a limited area such as a shop a car park an office building or an airport CCTV is commonly used in surveillance systems CD R Compact Disk Recordable A CD that can be written to once CD RW Compact Disk Read Write A rewriteable CD CIF Common Intermediate Format a set of standard video formats defined by their resolution The various designations refer to the number of horizontal and vertical lines of pixels retained from a digital image The designation 4CIF is equivalent to full frame video and CIF is one quarter of a frame CSD Camera Sabotage Detection A software feature that allows a plettac server to PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 determine whether a camera has been tampered with by analysing changes to the image being received from it 19 March 2009 1 Tf Intelligent Video Processing D 178 DVD DVD RW DVD RW DVD RAM Dome Camera FPS Frame Sync GUI GSM HD HDD IP ips ISDN MHD plettac FXL v4 4 Digital Video Disk or Digital Versatile Disk A storage medium similar to CD in diameter thickness and materials but with smaller grooves 740 nM and pits which provides superior capacity DVDs can comprise two reflective layers beneat
223. ort number of the plettac sentio server to which you want to connect 2 Enter your Username and Password 3 Press the OK button When the connection is established the default camera view is displayed You can use the Camera drop down menu to select any other camera available on the server Once you re connected to the plettac server you will be able to e Access live video images from the cameras linked to the server e View different cameras e Change viewing size to increase update rate e Record locally clicking on the record button This will change colour to purple and create a file in the folder where sPlayer is stored Click again on the record button to stop recording 106 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 amp plettac charter 11 0 arching Recorded Images Sophisticated and precise searches of all recorded images can be made using plettac s SearchExpert feature that is fully integrated into the interface for plettac sentio servers and the NetManager application SearchExpert function allows you to search all recorded images for motion related events This chapter de scribes the tasks that you can perform using SearchExpert It contains the following sections e Accessing SearchExpert e Quick Motion Search e Advanced Motion Search e Viewing Search Results 11 1 Accessing SearchExpert plettac s SearchExpert can be accessed from the either the NetManager main interface shown in Figure 11 1 or the Playback c
224. ould click Save button to save your configuration Your plettac server will always use the most recently saved configuration that was stored prior to the server being started You can modify any previously saved ATM configuration by clicking the Open button Accessing ATM Transaction Search ATM Transaction Search is associated with the plettac VMS s Search Expert function Search Expert can be accessed from the Playback control console of the server shown in Figure J 4 EVENT aon aa 17 19 23 23 MM 03 05 O7 09 111 13 SPEED aasal NAA EEE gt gt Figure J 4 DATE 15 OFAOF 2004 3 SA Export SearchExpert button on the server Playback control console The SearchExpert dialog box shown in Figure J 5 appears when you have ATM integration installed owen 1 F ow Start 12 11 2004 omm aj End 12 11 2004 14 25 13 ice ns Figure J 5 The SearchExpert dialog box showing the ATM Transaction Search tab J 5 1 Simple searches Click on the ATM Transaction Search tab and select the required ATM name from those available Motion Search ATM Transaction Search Am camo Results Time Selection 1 actions Dhak Name Start Time End Time Progress Tine 12 10 72004 From the Time Selection fields choose the required date and time periods that you wish to search for trans Figure J 6 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 a 12 11 2004 125 Transaction
225. our search result 11 4 Viewing Search Results The progress of each search is displayed in the Results panel Results Resulto 18 06 2004 13 50 43 18 06 2004 13 40 43 Result1 18 06 2004 13 50 43 18 06 2004 13 40 43 Result 1806 2004 15 50 43 18 06 2004 13 40 43 Result3 18 06 2004 13 50 43 18 06 2004 13 40 43 Camera Selection Result Merge Intersect Camera 05 Driveway WOKINGCCTY 2 Add Remove 1 1 2 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE NOTE NOTE Searching Recorded Images If you want to cancel the search at any time click the Abort button You can also right click on a name in the Results panel to access a pop up menu of commands 09 47 15 15 09f2004 10 47 15 100 Delete Play Abort When the search is complete double click on the result name to show a time line similar to Figure 11 4 with VMD events marked in yellow and motion events located using object analysis marked in green Search Results selected Time gt 23 06 2004 07 52 46 02 Car Park 2fvOKING Searched Times Stark EFAG HeT a 05 05 05 Displayed Times Start a O7 HeT mia 06 05 03 05 Driveway h OKINGE 07 Side Door external Figure 11 4 An example of a search result If your search is likely to take a long time you can double click on the Result name at any time while the search is in progress to display a snapsho
226. out CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 2 Drawing an Object Tracking region of interest for a camera 2 Select the camera for which you want to configure VMD from the drop down list of cameras 3 Click the Object Tracking check box in the Mode area This activates the Object Settings area 4 Decide whether your want to apply the VMD to the whole camera view or to a portion of it Oa If you want the VMD to cover the full camera view select the ROI radio button opposite the Object Tracking mode but do not draw any ROI Ob If you want the VMD to apply to just a part of the camera view select the ROI radio button position your mouse cursor in one corner of the area where you want an ROI and drag out the border to draw the box 5 If the direction of moving objects is significant use the Direction indicator in the Object Properties area to define the trigger direction s De select the segments of the Direction indicator for which you do not want VMD events triggered Initially all directions are selected coloured red So movement in any direction triggers a VMD event As you de select direction segments they turn white Figure 12 3 shows how you might configure Object Tracking to detect objects moving from right to left front to back or any direction in between Figure 12 3 Setting the direction for Object Tracking 6 If the size of moving objects is signific
227. ow outline may be partly hidden by the overlapping ROI but it has no effect on the configuration of the lower ROI Take care however not to completely overlap ROIs of the same mode This would make the overlapped ROI unselectable and you would therefore not be able to modify its configuration without first deleting the ROI that overlaps it Cameras Event WMD Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious ideo Motion Detection YMD Camera 03 Camera 03 v Sensitivity Level Pr 5 Delete AQI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 5 VMD configuration with multiple ROIs 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording 6 4 Associating Alarms with Cameras The plettac Sentio server can accept inputs from external alarm systems via cables connected to ports at the back of its casing as described in Appendix D Video Audio and Alarm Inputs on page 147 By associat ing an alarm input with a particular camera you can e highlight each occurrence of the alarm in Live Mode see section 9 4 e write an entry for that alarm event in the system s event log see section 8 3 e configure cameras to modify their recording whenever the alarm occurs see section 6 5 e configure automatic dial up of NetManager clients see section 6 7 e quickly locate each occurrence of the alarm in Playback Mode s
228. pears When you next commit your changes the message No Input appears in the camera view of the disabled camera in Live mode Total Quality Alarm VMD CSD 8 00 03 December 2004 SUPERVISOR Camera 01 NOTE Disabling Live mode display has no effect on recordings from the same camera 4 3 1 Why disable Live Mode video display On plettac Sentio systems without Live mode enhancement hardware live display update is managed exclu sively by the system s software This can affect the update rate of live displays and the overall performance of the system This is especially true when remote connections are made and on plettac Sentio E or plettac Sentio EX systems in general Disabling Live display can therefore enhance system performance by not displaying any unnecessary live images 4 4 Specifying when a Camera should Record Click in the Record Time column of the Cameras tab to specify when a camera should record Select one of the following options from the drop down list ROSA s 5 Ho Hame rs IPS Resolution Fields s ouarity Alar m vmo cso 01 Camera 01 a 1 720 x 255 single field 1 00 11 A a 02 Camera 02 A 0 720 x 288 single field 0 00 11 S S 03 Camera 03 SK 1 720 x 288 single field 1 00 11 A 4 04 Camera 04 oo Bugar 720 x 288 single field 0 00 11 Effect Specifies that the input from the cam
229. pping the first ROI 12 1 4 Configuring Object Removal SVMD In some security scenarios movement in the vicinity of valuable objects must be tolerated In an Art gallery or museum the public must be free to approach valuable displays as long s they do not interfere with them in any way PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 1 1 9 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Object Removal mode VMD enables you to configure a camera to trigger VMD events when a familiar object in the camera view is moved removed or obscured To configure a camera to use Object Removal mode VMD use the following procedure 1 Open the VMD menu of the Configuration Console as shown in Figure 12 5 Cam Event YMD Preview Patrol Capacity Sched Engin Log Audio Piz Users Options Suspic CSD Video Motion Detection MMD Camera 03 Camera 03 SYMD Sensitivity Level Jp 0 Output On Display Duration before alarm 5 secs Learning Duration 5 secs Mode Enable jv YMD Object Tracking Sues EEE E Abandoned Object Occlusion Je5 A MV Object Removal Object Settings D 15 60 100 Sze HJ 0 100 Direction amp Delete ROI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 5 Drawing an Object Removal ROI for a camera Select the camera for which you want to configure VMD from the drop down list of cameras
230. quencer The sequencer is an extra hardware option that enables you to display a timed selection of cameras with text overlays on up to 4 spot monitors With the sequencer option you can attach up to four sequence mon itors on a single server either for continuous display of any one of the 16 cameras or for cyclical display of PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 5 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 any number of cameras with fully programmable durations and text captions up to 11 lines of 28 charac ters 1 4 16 Pan Tilt Zoom Control PTZ software for a number of leading camera manufacturers equipment is available as an optional extra If you have this software installed and enable the feature for the appropriate cameras users of the NetManager or plettac Sentio server interfaces will be able to control these cameras movement via the PTZ controls of the Live mode GUI For more information see section 9 5 Pan Tilt Zoom Functionality on page 79 1 4 17 Integration with other Building Systems Many industrial and intelligent building systems use OLE for Process Control OPC to exchange data e The plettac Sentio server includes an OPC Server which provides an interface for integration with other OPC compliant systems For detailed information refer to the plettac Sentio OPC Server User Guide e The plettac Sentio server includes an Active X control to enable single cameras to be viewed within a third party appl
231. r inclusion in the monitored servers but NetAlert will report that they are not responding 12 7 Time Synchronization This is an optional suite of software and associated hardware consisting of the following Component Description Lindy Precision Clock An external 60 kHz MSF tme code receiver connected to the PC via the serial port Tardis An NTP server application allowing PCs on a network to synchronize their clocks with the PC running Tardis WinSync An NTP server application allowing PCs to synchronize their clocks with a nominated server Table 12 5 Components of a Time Synchronization system i INFORMATION Ifyour plettac intelligent video management system is part of a network it is essential that all associated machines are synchronised to the same time source whether that is a dedicated 132 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options external clock or a particular computer Following successful installation there are no user configuration or reporting functions For further information about plettac s recommended time synchronisation process refer to your plettac FXL Installation Guide D WARNING If your system uses a WinSync Tardis combination to synchronize time you may need to restart the Tardis application on 01 January each year 12 8 Dynamic Re Archiving If you have purchased a system with the Dynamic Re Archive option you can retain recordings on your sys tem for lo
232. rate quality and duration Suspicious Alarm The plettac Sentio server provides for one alarm input to be connectec with one or more manually activated buttons for use typically in financial institutions when staff members observe suspicious activities or persons Several cameras can be associated with the suspicious alarm so that the activation of any button triggers recording on all configured cameras Video Motion Detection VMD The VMD feature enables you to configure the server to detect when there is motion in the camera view or in selected Regions of Interest ROIs of that camera view Super Video Motion Detection If you have purchased the Super VMD SVMD product option it SVMD enables the plettac Sentio server to apply enhanced detection rules to one camera view SVMD functionality enables you to detect in one or more ROls of the SVMD camera view whenever e an object is removed e a foreign object is deposited e a moving object matches any combination of the following criteria its size matches a specified range its speed matches a specified range it moves in one of more specified directions SVMD functionality is described in detail in section 12 1 Super Video Motion Detection SVMD on page 115 Camera Sabotage Detection The CSD feature enables you to configure the server to display an CSD on screen message or raise an alarm when a camera is obscured or moved The recording rate and quality is us
233. rchable in the Historical Event Viewer nor displayed on the Playback timeline By default VMD Logging is switched on as illustrated below De select the Enable VMD Logging 68 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual System Administration Tasks check box to turn it off Options Event Dial Up on Alarm Streamer Network Bandwidth Limit Enable limit Enable Streamer YMD Logging Alarm Options Vv Enable YMD Logging Stop Rec on Alarm Acknowledgment About CLOSE APPLICATION OK Cancel Apply Having VMD Logging on or off will influence system performance because on startup a database repair is performed If there are large numbers of VMD events gt 200 000 this can take several minutes Your plettac Sentio server estimates the time to perform the repair If the time is lt 30s the message Status Connecting to server is shown If it is likely to be gt 30s the message Verifying database This may take n minutes Please wait where n is 1 or greater 5 If you want a printed record of the log click the Print button at the bottom of the screen A printer must be installed and defined as the default printer Cameras Event v Preview Hard Disk Schedules Multi HD Log Jaudio Users Options l Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye Active cameras at startup 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 Stopped CL
234. remote users e connection or loss of video and audio inputs Configuration Activities Lists all the configuration tasks performed on the server in the 24 hour period Display All Lists log entries of all types Table 8 2 Log Entry Selections Available for display Once you make a selection the logged entries of the specified type begin to load in the window This can take quite a while to load especially if you choose the Display All option Each entry in the log is displayed on a new line which begins with the code for that type of log entry 4 You can sort the way the entries are displayed in one of three ways e To sort log entries by code click on the column heading Code e To sort log entries by alphabetical order of their description click on the column heading Description e To sort log entries by date click on the column heading Date You can reverse any of these sort orders by clicking the same column heading a second time Figure 8 2 and Figure 8 3 on page 70 show examples of different selections and sort orders IS WARNING You can switch off VMD Logging if your system is generating large numbers of VMD events With VMD Logging turned off VMD events are not put into the database at all nor are they displayed in the Log tab Images are recorded at the specified Event ips as normal While the images associated with a VMD event are recorded no referencing information is stored with them so they will not be sea
235. rks with different bandwidths Ayen abeuwj JO weajjs ezed AV poods Ny 71 yore 10 SWIBdI S ezed AV sdi GZ esoweo JO weajjs ezed AV poods Ny 71 yoeea 10 sweaijs ezed AV Tol Brey am pajsoddns xemw sdi QL DM esoweo sdi 0J pasoddns xemw 10 100 1000 10 100 1000 Mbps Mbps Mbps Mbps 2213 Table B 2 Size of PAL data stream captured at 10 ips and at 25 ips with Audio 1 42 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 amp plettac Appennix C Archiving Guidelines C 1 Archiving on the plettac range The Archival feature on plettac s range of servers uses substantial processing resources When plettac systems are connected in complex configurations with a number of network connections certain operational guidelines need to be followed Some of the system functions become restricted This document outlines the primary restrictions C 1 1 plettac E The E can be configured for both the PAL and NTSC versions to archive the maximum configurable i e no limitation images for single and multiple camera options However a maximum of two NetManagers may be attached with one in continuous playback exporting Points of note 1 With the archive feature in use Playback SearchExpert and Exporting should not be attempted directly from the server NetManager should be used for these functions 2 No Streaming should be attempted if the archive function has been configured 3 The NetManagers should not be left in a st
236. ro rr nana 47 Deleting existing ROIS sssssssssessressassressresranrren rer rrrn rer sne rrrn rens rs nr rr rann ann 48 Associating Alarms with Cameras inosmmrsrrssrrrrssrrrrrrrerrenrrn rer rrrr rer rer ren rann aa 49 Associating an alarm input with cameraS nssmsssssesresrrerrerrerrenrrrrenrrnr ror rna 49 Configuring alarm output for a CAaMCIA sssessesssrsrrrrrrsrrerrrrrren rer rr enn rer r rn nr an 51 Configuring Video Loss Output alarMS LiDsnmnnessessresrrssrrssrresrrrrrrrrrrn rann rann 52 Configuring Event Based Recording ssmnsmnssressrssresrresrrrrrerrrrrrenrrrrrenr ran r an 54 Configuring the SUSPICIOUS Alarm unnssmmssssessrsrrrsrresrrrrrrrrrrsrrrrrrrr sir rr rn rna ann 55 Termination of Suspicious alarm recording ocnsssmsssrsssrssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrrr rear aa 58 Configuring Dial Up on Alarm mosmosssesressresrrrsraessrrsrrerr rer rrr snar rr rr rr rr rann rr eran 58 Configuring Acknowledgements to Stop Recording sm essssessrresresrrsrsa 60 Configuring Scheduled Recording ssssssssssrssrssrss rsarrsnrnnrr 61 Defining Recording Schedules nmissmrsssrssressresrrssrrrrrrrrrrnrrrr ren r ren r rr nns rr rn nr an 61 Create a SCHEed 0 eee een ee ene sas bok H ren ee Ee Diin 62 Modifying Schedules ssnsssssssssesrresrrrrrenrrenrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr kanska rn RA RKA RR ARR ARR R RR nn 63 Applying Schedules to CAMeras sissosssssressresrrersrrerrrrrrrrrrrr ris rss rr rens ran rann 63 System Administration Tasks sm ssssssssssrsssssasssarsnrnn nn
237. ror rer enn rr nn rean 131 12 6 4 AUCIO ONY AICI S tetera caste cas ce E eae etececen eee LS 132 12 6 5 NetAlert on Older Servers cccccecccseecceececeececeeceeeeeeeueeeaueesseeeseneesaues 132 12 7 Time Synchronization sessioni e E 132 12 8 Dynamic Re Archiving c ccccecccecceeeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeeeseeees 133 12 8 1 Configuring Archive for a camera s IMAGES ceccceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 133 12 8 2 Previewing Archive quality ccccscccsscceeeceeeeceeeseseceeeceeeseeeeeeeseeeenes 134 12 8 3 How Archive can extend system CaPpaCitY sssssesrrsresresrrorrorren rer anna 134 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual 12 8 4 Configuring the Archive Time Limit Litsosmsssssssessrsrrsrrerrresrresrerrrorrer ren rr nr aa 135 12 8 5 Selecting recordings for Archive by Event type ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 136 Appendix A Compression and Archival Ratios ssssssssssssssssssrssnsrnrnnnan 139 A 1 NTSC Image Quality and File SIZ S cece cceccceeccceeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeeaes 139 A 1 1 Adjustment for different CIF reSOlutions cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 140 A 2 Archival Compression Ratios ccccecccececeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeaes 140 A 2 1 Archival File SIZ S ccccccecccsecceeeeeneeceeeteeeteneceeeeseetaneeeeeseeeteeeteeeeees 140 Appendix B Network Bandwidth Requirements ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeees
238. rr rann r annan 26 Allocating a network drive for recording omosmmssssssessrrsrrssrrsrrenrrenrrrrr rr r nan 26 Removing a hard disk from allocated Storage minnnnessesssssrsrrsrrrrrerrerr annan 26 Analogue Camera ConfiguratiON ssssssssssrsssrsarsarssrrsnnrnn nana 27 The Goel e tes TOD ancciectnwesanctereuavenesonenicm esau sees anus eaicuucecaceeaceeseeencines 21 Customising Camera Names unssnssrssrssrrssresrresrrerrrrrrr rr rr rrrr rens rr rss rr sn rna 28 Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display cccccccceceseeeeeeseeeaeeeees 28 Why disable Live Mode video display cccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeees 29 Specifying when a Camera Should Record oun cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 29 Setting the Video Recording Rate nnssmmssssessessessrrrrssrenrrsrrnrrrrrerrenr enn r ora 30 Setting the Video Recording Quality osmomsmessesssessressrsrrrerrrsrrenr ren rer rr rer r anna 30 image capture Trmal asien 31 Performance adjustments cccccceecceeecseeceseceeecaueeceeecueesaeesneseeeenes 31 Enabling Alarm Detection cccccccsecceeeeceeeeceeceeeseeeseescesseeeseeeceeeas 32 Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD ccccceceeeececeseeceeeeeeeeeeaes 32 Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD ssssssssressessresrresrrrrrror ran 32 Previewing Video Quality ssossnsssrasssrsssrrsesrressrresrrerrrrnr rr rn r rr rs rr sn rr rr rn nara nan 32 Configuring Audio Recording sssmmmsesssessr
239. rr rr rr ren r rr nr nn rr nana 4 Pre defined Recording Schedules nnsmsmmssssrssresrresrrerrrerrrsrrrn rien nns ren r rn roar 4 Playback while recording ccccceccceccssececececceeecaeeceecceeeaseeueeseeeseesneneas 4 Improved Live display nsmrmnssssssssssrsrsrenasrerrnre rar ro ren kn rakan kran kn R RAR ARK KRK RAR ARR n 4 Extended Video Retention cccccccccseccecceeceeceeeaseceesuecaeeeeeceesuessesaeeas 5 Networked SEVICE irern ES Err i 5 Remote Monitoring and Configuration messssssssssrssrrsrrrrrrsrrrrrrrrr enn rer norr ana D Camera IP l l erora testo A Ne D Bi Direcional AU GIO sesoses enna Aa E E 5 SEENE r E ee ne 5 Pan Tilt Zoom GC OMMOLN csccmsnacsovesichitsncersuamasvtensaactanneeteccdenenieteniontadconietenas 6 Integration with other Building Systems omosmmsssssrssrrssrssrrerrrerrrrr rer rrnr rann 6 User Interfaces cccccccccccsccceceeeeeteeeceneeeseceeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeesteeetsneeeneeeeeenaeeans 6 The plettac User Interface sssssssssrssrsarssrsarnnrnnr nn rn nn Rn RR Anna 9 Overview of the Main Screen cccceeccneeceeeeceecseceteeteeeceneeeneeeeeeeseeeaes 9 UNS VAY ATOA onai aR Na ESE aaa 10 AIAG Ie N OWS aa E sated intr 11 Systemi COCK onsas a e aO 12 Mode Selection Buttons sssnossssssessresressrrsressrenrrrr rer sne rr rr rer kr rr rn RAR Rana nn 12 THE Live BU NO ie vicccasciseccosncsnnunnetesinsenreaitdwaasaesovnstaasiecabepewnssiedeoundanheiicwcaniayadieas 12 ING Play OAC UO
240. rver runs on a different machine from the plettac server it can stream only Live images to clients that connect to it Your application can connect to different plettac servers to stream pictures If you change the Activex control s server or port number while it is streaming it will automatically disconnect and reconnect using the new information F 1 1 Calculating the on screen size of the video Image height is calculated from the width and the aspect ratio of the screen If you are viewing at 1024x768 and use a width of 400 the height will be calculated as 400 x 768 1024 300 Note that there is a border of 2 pixels all round and that the 4 camera layout is 25 pixels high if used You can now calculate the overall height and width of the control necessary for embedding in html as well as general user interface design F 1 2 Comparison with Streamer product option plettac ActiveX streams video data using the plettac sentiO system s native wavelet compression This means that the images are of much higher quality that those streamed via the Streamer product option See section 9 6 Video Streamer on page 83 However it also means that the streamed images are up to 10 times larger in bytes than images streamed via the Streamer option The bandwidth of the network across which your ActiveX application is streaming affects its performance Frames may be dropped if there is not enough bandwidth PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 1
241. s PTZ SUPPOIT sosssorrovstvssessrssoserrsstesrersrssnn 79 dual authentication oo eee 73 DVD burning Software musser 94 export tO deicsmnscresnemsesstcresnctereterisn 93 write speed usssssssrsrssssesrsrsseresrsrsnrnrn enn 94 Dynamic Re Archive essees 5 E event AGK UMIC serana rR 99 acknowledgement o s 99 automatic deletion 0 0 0 25 configuration esseere 43 8 0 310167 r 60 SLACK lotacicpiarictes n san ohare tears 24 stack size essien 24 trigger time eessen 99 triggering recording eesse 54 event locator buttons ou 16 event 070 ee 68 Event Review utility 0 17 96 events SUMMALY oe eee 98 fill flNO ccece cca ceren teenie ccree cence 97 startup rr 96 TOOLS ie tects ese 97 transfer to Export cce 101 event type BOOM paa AEA 98 selection re 98 stacked xssiericcsasdisactavosssieetoaniomasemoonsionsans 98 event based recording eseese 43 54 EXPONO scdesccacssscacsssustesectcusseebasscectssenes 101 hard disk usage ou eee eeeeeees 22 PFr leCUON omstridd 22 FEVIQWING oomessesssrsrsreresesesrererersersrnrrnen enn 100 SLACK aE inateens 22 events acknowledging essees 78 deleting from database 102 Htenng ossssskeesisusissis bese sisten 97 FEVIQWIING D 17 selection for display s 97 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 EXDONM serisine ereinek eea i ainan 1 SACCOS SS erer E A 73 CANCE aana 95 event based recordings 101 DIGV
242. s you can force the server to record 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording more intensively when alarms and events occur This is described in section 6 5 Configuring Event Based Recording on page 54 Cameras Event Jumo Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious l tame so ton maston ee al eee a Hame Duration Duration Output Output Duration State yi Input04 Change of State 5s Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed None Closed Closed 5s 5s ah f ak j a t f at a er 4 4 4 4 L 4 E BI BI E E bh BIR About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 7 Setting the Pre Event Duration for an Event 6 4 2 Configuring alarm output for a camera If you have alarm outputs wired to the alarm blocks of the plettac Sentio server you can have the server mani fest the external alarms it receives by passing them on to another device Alarm outputs from the server could terminate at a network management system an audible signal or a warning light that draws further attention to the alarm condition If for example a door is opened the system receives an external alarm which it registers and possibly uses for event based recordi
243. s covert affects the operation of the streaming function of your plettac Sentio system For further information refer to section 9 6 1 Enabling the Streamer on page 84 Controlling Access to Interfaces The right hand side of the Users menu of the Configuration Console contains an access control mask which you can use to control users access to the GUI features described in Table 8 5 on page 72 You can decide whether users of a particular user group have access to each of these features and whether they need to connect with a password to use those features Dual Authentication Dual Authentication provides stricter control by making it necessary for two people to enter their username and password in order to access or modify a particular feature plettac Sentio software has three levels of user Standard User Manager and Administrator When utilising Dual Authentication the second authorisation must be of at least the next level of user as shown in Table 8 6 below User Level Level required for Dual Authentication Standard Manager or Administrator Manager Manager or Administrator Administrator Administrator Table 8 6 Dual Authentication levels PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 13 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 The example in Figure 8 8 shows that a second password is required when either a Standard User or a Man ager wants to access the Configuration console The Standard User would require at least
244. search time and date selection 19 March 2009 173 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 After choosing the time period to search you can click the Search button to find all transactions that occurred Once the search has been completed the Progress column will show 100 If nothing is selected in the Search Pattern panel the search will find all transactions of the selected ATM in the specified time period NOTE If no search pattern is defined there may be too many transactions and processing the search will take a long time Right click in the Results panel to display a pop up menu with the following selections Results Time Selection Name Start Time End Time Progress Date Time Result 18 10 2004 11 33 00 18 11 2004 11 33 00 18 10 2004 11 33 00 18 11 2004 11 33 00 18 10 2 Result3 1810 2 Delete All 16 11 2004 11 33 Result4 1810 2 5 ResultS 18 102 Delete Result2 Start 18 10 2004 11 33 18 11 2004 11 33 00 18 11 2004 11 33 00 100 18 11 2004 11 33 00 18 11 2004 11 33 00 End e Delete Delete selected search results e Delete All Delete all search results listed in the Results panel e Play Play the selected search result This menu item is only enabled if there is only one selection and selected result is 100 completed e Abort Abort the current search if the search is still being conducted Double click on the result entry to open the ATM
245. ser dialog shown in Figure 8 5 User Name and Password Username Summera NNNNNNNNSN Password HHRRMMHEEE Figure 8 5 Setting the privileges for a new User Account 3 Specify values in the fields provided as described in Table 8 4 Field Description Username Enter a username consisting of at least 5 alphanumeric characters Password Enter a password consisting of at least 5 alphanumeric characters Retype New Retype the password For safety reasons you cannot copy and paste Login Group From the drop down list select one of the groups described in Table 8 5 on page 72 Table 8 4 Fields of the Add User dialog PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 71 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Table 8 5 shows the access rights assigned to a new user by their user group Administrator Manager Standard User Feature Playback Export Configuration Playback Export Configuration Playback Export Configuration Access when enabled Full access to all Playback controls Full access to export controls Full access to all menus on the server and via remote clients Full access to all Playback controls Full access to export controls Full access to all menus on the server but not via remote clients Full access to all Playback controls Full access to export controls Access only to the Users menu to modify own password No access via remote clients No
246. server to trigger a system event when there is motion in a cam era view or in selected Regions of Interest ROIs VMD events are highlighted on screen in live mode and in playback You can also configure the server to use VMD events as recording triggers thereby recording from a camera only when motion is detected With the Super VMD SVMD option you can apply enhanced detection rules to a camera view enabling the server to raise VMD events only when an object e Moves in a specific direction or range of directions e Fits in a defined size range e Moves faster or slower than a defined range of speed e Disappears from the view e Is abandoned in the view Alarm and Event Based Recording When integrated with other Security or Building Management systems the plettac server can accept alarm inputs from external contacts and switches As with VMD events these alarms can also be used to trigger recording or to increase the image frequency or quality of cameras that are already recording This can reduce the amount of data you need to store on disk In Playback mode recordings made during Alarm and VMD events are marked to assist easy retrieval You can use the event locator buttons to skip from event to event and quickly judge the significance of the recordings Camera Sabotage Detection Enabling the camera sabotage detection CSD feature allows you to configure your system to trigger a sys tem event when a camera s normal opera
247. sk Ci Select an item bo view its I H MEW Ds description H S Dems on wekserver E FE public on wekserver Fs Capacity 4 26 MB a pcapps on w2kserver Gr 2 Control Panel C Used 4 26 MB C Free 0 bytes Figure 10 18 sPlayer retrieval from CD 2 Double click on the sPlayerEXT icon to start the application as shown in Figure 10 19 CS 21 Look in E cd gt a ej Ez a 05 _23 10 39_07 August 2003__23 12 39_07 August 2003 mw File name 05 23 10 39 07 August 2003 23 12 39 O7 A Files of type Stream Files rmw Cancel 4 oe K Open Playback File Figure 10 19 sPlayer Start Up 3 Click the Playback button to see a list of available recordings sPlayer opens a dialog to let you locate the file you want 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 104 User Manual Playback Mode Operations 4 Click on the name of the file you want to play it will automatically enter the file name box Figure 10 20 shows sPlayer in playback mode Frame 41 12528 aias Connect Playback J _ Settings 2 x Display Large I Playback Frame 414125 18 Jul 2003 04 00 05 Figure 10 20 sPlayer in Playback mode e The Connect button enables you to connect to any plettac sentio server on your network e The Playback button displays the open file dialog box e The Settings button gives access to the options available when replaying images in full screen mode sPlayer Setti
248. sole Thus you can only control one PTZ camera at a time Camera 01 Camera 05 h e Figure 9 6 The PTZ Control Console Standard at left and Auto Focus NOTE When you enable the Auto Focus feature for any IP camera on your network if it is also a PTZ camera the focussing button on the PTZ control panel will be disabled The 8 preset position keys P1 to P8 can be used to store and reposition the PTZ camera at any time To store the current position click and hold the required P1 to P8 button until it changes from purple back to grey To reposition to any of the previously stored positions simply click on the required P1 to P8 button The 4 function keys F1 to F4 are defined for each supported PTZ protocol These can be edited to suit your requirements For further information refer to section 9 5 3 PTZ Function Key configuration The description of each function key thus defined will be displayed as a tool tip if the mouse hovers over the function key for more than a couple of seconds The following short cut keys on the number pad of the keyboard can be used to control the currently selected PTZ camera in addition to using the PTZ dialog with Num Lock off Numeric Key Function Pan Left PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 81 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 Numeric Key Function 8 T Tilt Upwards Table 9 2 PTZ Control Keys NOTE Special commands strings for Pelco P
249. splay List Each row you add to the list contains a column in which you can configure the following parameters Cell Description Camera Select one of the cameras on your system Alarm Click the check box to specify that this camera view automatically appears on the sequence monitor when it has an active alarm The time period for which the camera view is to be displayed 1 to 999 seconds 1 28 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Product Options Cell Description Text Any required text that you want to display with the camera view and any control characters to modify the text as shown in Table 12 3 below Table 12 2 Settings in each row of the display sequence 6 Continue to click the Add button to add the new rows to the sequence You can add as many rows as you want to the sequence As Figure 12 13 shows you can place multiple entries for the same camera view in the sequence 3 To delete an entry from the display list select that row and click the Remove button To clear all the entries from the display list click the None button 12 5 1 1 Controlling the Appearance of Sequencer Text Overlays When entering text several control codes are available to be issued to the Sequencer Text Overlay Command Description Text Only NB 1 is a lower case L Opaque Text NB 1 is a lower case L The is the Control Sequence Introducer CSI obtained with Num Lock on and by holding down the left hand Alt key whi
250. ss If you are exporting on the plettac server machine ensure that the door covering the CD DVD drive is open during the export process 10 3 3 1 Required software for export to CD or DVD The plettac Server is supplied complete with a CD DVD writer and with the correct burning software Ahead Nero Burner v5 0 or later The NetManager installation also includes the Nero Burner software ap plication If a remote client machine running NetManager does not have a CD or DVD writer only Export to hard drives and network drives is possible If the Nero Burner has been uninstalled from your machine or is already running when you start the Export utility your CD or DVD writer will not be available for Export and the following message is displayed in the Export Dialog CD Burning software could not initialise Ensure it is not already in use 10 3 3 2 Configuring the Write Speed of Export to CD or DVD Using a run time configuration setting you can configure your remote client or plettac server to export at the speed that best suits your CD or DVD drive Table 10 3 shows the configuration strings that you can configure in the properties of your plettac server or NetManager clients to configure write speeds Configuration Speed CDR12 12x Speed CDR16 16x Speed CDR24 24x Speed Note The faster the write speed selected the more system resources the Export utility requires 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Playb
251. ssage Area in Live mode In Live mode the area of the main screen below the Display Area is used to display transient messages and the menu options of separately licensed product options The following types of information may be dis played in this area GUI Element Description Network On the GUI of the plettac Sentio server a panel on the bar at the bottom of the Connections screen displays the number of network client connections open to the server Counter This represents the number of NetManager NetManagerLite and sPlayer clients currently connected to the server Alarm Ack Popup If you have defined Alarm conditions for any of the cameras connected to the plettac Sentio server the Alarm acknowledgement pop up dialog appears in the message area This shows which alarm has occurred and prompts you to acknowledge the Alarm and stop any associated recording by clicking the button labelled ACK Type Alarm Input Trigger Time Camera List I Input 01 2005 03 25 15 25 59 Input 02 2005 03 25 15 25 58 Input 03 2005 03 25 15 25 57 Input Od 2005 03 25 15 25 57 sBDA Controls If you have the Bi directional Audio SBDA product option installed the sBDA controls are also displayed in the message area of both the server and NetManager GUls Table 2 2 Interface elements displayed in Message Area in Live mode 1 4 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE The plettac User Interface This area is used to
252. ssing plettac FXL v4 4 8 4 NOTE Cameras Evert nto Preview Hard Disk Schedules Muti HD Log Jaudio Users Options Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye Active cameras at startup 1 2 3 456 7 8 9 1011 1216 Stopped CLOSE APPLICATION Button Pressed in Configuration Menu YMD Alarm on camera 1 YMD Alarm on camera 6 User Administrator logged in YMD Alarm on camera 11 YMD Alarm on camera 1 YMD Alarm on camera 5 YMD Alarm on camera 6 User Login Prompted Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye Cameras on the screen changed Camera 11 is displayed in 1 camera display mode Cameras on the screen changed Cameras 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 are displaye YMD Alarm on camera 6 YMD Alarm on camera 11 YMD Alarm on camera 6 Cameras on the screen changed Camera 6 is displayed in 1 camera display mode YMD Alarm on camera 3 YMD Alarm on camera 2 2003 08 06 15 07 24 2003 08 06 15 07 24 2003 08 06 15 07 16 2003 08 06 15 07 14 2003 08 06 15 07 13 2003 08 06 15 07 12 2003 08 06 15 07 12 2003 08 06 15 07 11 2003 08 06 15 07 10 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 07 08 2003 08 06 15 07 07 2003 08 06 15 07 06 2003 08 06 15 07 05 2003 08 06 15 07 03 2003 08 06 15 06 59 2003 08 06 15 06 59 2003 08 06 15 06 59 2003 08 06 15 06 54 2003 08 06 15 06 54
253. sssssssssssssrsrs ss ss nnrnnrnnnn nn nn nn ARR R 2 nn 2 155 F 1 ACTIVEX OVESVICW muosesreereoreoreesresreorerrerrrer rer rer rer rer rer rr RR RAKA RKS R RER KAR KAR nns 155 F 1 1 Calculating the on screen size of the video smmssssssssrssressresrrrrrrrr rinna nn 155 F 1 2 Comparison with Streamer product Option sssssesrerresrrrrrsrrsrrorror ror 155 Fd Properties and Methods for ACtiVEX cccccceecceseecceseeeteeeeeseeneeeeaees 156 F21 Dlettac Sento PrOPE rtieS ee cceccccscceseecceeeseeeceneeeseeseeeteceeneeaeeesaeees 156 F 2 2 Dlettac Sentio MeEthOdS ccc cece eecceeceeeeeeseecseeceeesseeceeeeeeeeeneeseeeaeeenaes 156 F 3 ActiveX Installa OMen enean 157 F 4 Example of plettac Sentio Controls in HTML cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 157 Appendix G Run Time CONfigUratiON ssssssssssss ssrrs rsrsnrnarnnnnrnn nn nn nn 32 159 G 1 Setting a Run Time Parameter cccccccsccccecececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeees 159 G 2 Run Time Te Aiea lsessssasunsensn tass ace ri Ai 160 Appendix H Recordings during Summer Winter Daylight Saving Changes 163 H 1 Moving to Daylight Saving TimMe cccccccsecceceeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeseeeesaes 163 H 2 Moving from Daylight Saving Time cccccceeccceseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaees 163 H 2 1 Constant recording during the changeover cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 163 H 2 2 Event based recording during the changeover
254. t End 15 09 2004 10 27 25 Add Remove search ROI Browse J M Draw _ Delete Delete all Camera Selection Results Name start Time End Time Progress You cannot save any settings you have made for a camera All defaults are reset each time you quit out of SearchExpert To enable SearchExpert to analyse your recorded images you must select a start and end time and date that you want to search Either type the times required directly or use the spinner arrows to adjust the hour minute and second value for the two times The date can either be entered directly or by clicking the down arrow to display a standard calendar display Time Selection Specify Times Use Result Times Date Time Start 21 06 2004 14 44 End 21 06 2004 gt 14 41 44 If you have already searched the recordings from a camera you can highlight it and click Use Result Times as the search times for another camera For example if a search of the recorded images from a camera in a car park shows some motion events you can use this time frame to search what other cameras in the building recorde 19 March 2009 d at the same time PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Searching Recorded Images 11 2 Quick Motion Search The default settings for SearchExpert is for Quick Motion Search at a rate of one image per second x1 with Sensitivity set to 40 The Figure 11 3 shows
255. t Duration field specify how long you want recordings to last when triggered by the event In the drop down list you can choose from 10 pre set durations from 5 seconds to 30 minutes or you can specify Until Ack to ensure that the special recording continues until manually acknowledged by an operator 4 When an event occurs it may be more important to see what happened before the alarm or VMD was triggered than the images that follow the event To make sure that action before the alarm event is recorded use the Pre Event Duration field From the drop down list select a length of time preceding the alarm event that you also want the plettac Sentio server to record to disk The default value for this field is None If you select any of the values from 1 second to 30 minutes all information for this pre event period is recorded to disk in addition to all the images following the event The ips rate and image quality for the post event recordings are as set on the Event tab The recording quality of the pre event period remains at the rate set in the Cameras menu NOTE Where the pre event duration is less than or equal to 30 seconds the recording rate can be switched from the normal ips to a higher event ips Pre event durations of greater than 30 seconds are usually selected where a system is configured only to record in response to an alarm 6 6 Configuring the Suspicious Alarm On each plettac Sentio server you can configure one
256. t a picture 3 Use the Playback frame advance controls to pause the picture at the precise point from which you require to print an image 4 Choose a screen layout that displays the picture s you need to print When you select the Print button the utility opens a standard Windows print dialog box for each camera view on display For example If you select Print with Playback paused in sixteen view layout then a dialog box for each of the 16 cameras will be opened If you do not require the image from a particular camera view you will have to cancel the dialog box for that camera The Print dialog box allows you to choose where the image is printed The printer button changes from black to pink as the image is spooled to your printer You can also access the Print utility by clicking Export while Playback is paused and then clicking the Export Utility s Print button 10 5 Capturing Images in Playback Mode The Image Capture utility captures still images from Playback mode when playing is paused To capture still images from Playback use the following procedure 1 Playback the video sequence from which you want to capture a picture 2 Use the Playback frame advance controls to pause the picture at the precise point at which you require a still image 3 Select a screen layout that shows only the image s you want to capture If 16 tiles are displayed then all 16 camera views are captured If you want to capture the image from only one ca
257. t drives available for export depend on the hardware and software installed on the machine on which you run the export utility See section 10 3 3 1 Required software for export to CD or DVD Browse Button that enables you to locate target storage devices on the local machine and on the network Do not use this browser to select a CD or DVD drive as Advanced Click this button to specify CD and DVD writer options See section 10 3 3 Exporting to CD or DVD on page 93 Fields of the Record Selection panel Start Time Fields you use to specify the starting time stamp of the video recording you want to export Enter the date and time using the keyboard or spinner arrows The date spinner displays a calendar from which you can select the date only if there recordings on the server s disks from that date End Time Fields in which you specify the closing time stamp of the video recording you want to export Enter the date and time using the keyboard or spinner arrows The date spinner displays a calendar from which you can select the date only if there recordings on the server s disks from that date Camera Drop down list from which you can select the camera from which the export data was originally recorded Add Video amp Audio Button that creates an entry in the export list that includes both the audio and video tracks for the selected camera and times If audio input is associated with the camera whose recordings you are exporting it c
258. t is not possible to use the NetManager to remove hard disks from the server s allocated recording space Removing and re allocating a hard disk provides a quick mechanism for clearing all recorded data from a disk 26 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 piettac ecurity UK Limited CHAPTER 4 Analogue Camera Configuration When your plettac Sentio is first installed it has a default configuration that records images on all the available video input channels at all times This includes standard settings for the frequency and quality of images recorded This chapter describes how to configure the basic camera recording functions of the plettac Sentio It con tains the following sections The Cameras Tab Customising Camera Names Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display Specifying when a Camera should Record Setting the Video Recording Rate Setting the Video Recording Quality Enabling Alarm Detection Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD Enabling Camera Sabotage Detection CSD Previewing Video Quality Configuring Audio Recording Enabling Alarm Switch Recording 4 1 The Cameras Tab Using the Cameras tab of the Configuration Console you can perform the following tasks for any of the cameras connected to your system PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Customising Camera Names Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display Specifying when a Camera should Record For example you may want the camera s covering the lobby
259. t of the events found Move the red cursor or double click on the timeline at the time where you wish the playback of the searched results to start and click the Play button The precise time of where the cursor is placed is displayed in the Selected Time panel The Displayed Times is the time shown between the left and right edges of the Search Results window and the Searched Times is the total time segment of the search result If your PC s mouse has a mouse wheel you can use it to zoom in and zoom out on the timeline so that the displayed time intervals get shorter or longer Playback will switch to the display area of the NetManager or server interface The text at the bottom of the camera view will show that it is in Search Expert Mode as illustrated below Depending on which search results you want to view you can use any of the following steps e Double click on a camera name in the Search Results panel to playback the events from that individual camera e Select more than one camera name highlighting them in blue as shown in Figure 11 4 and click the arrow button to display the results from the selected cameras e Click the arrow button with all camera names unselected to play all the search results for all cameras When using SearchExpert from the server interface the Event buttons of the Playback console will still move between recorded events not searched events PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 113
260. t the performance of the ROI The ROI should enable you to eliminate most false VMD events by only detecting motion in the area you consider most significant If false VMD events still occur you may need to redraw the ROI or adjust the sensitivity of the camera view 2 When you are satisfied that the configuration triggers the kinds of VMD events in which you are interested click on OK to commit your changes You may then draw additional ROIs in the cam era to cover all significant areas of the camera view Deleting existing ROIs On the VMD menu if you select a camera that already has multiple ROIs defined the ROIs appear as clear boxes in a shaded area that covers the camera view One ROI the last one drawn is automatically selected The Delete ROI button becomes active which enables you to delete the selected ROI from the VMD config uration If you delete an ROI the most recently drawn ROI is selected until there are no more ROIs and the default ROI covering the whole camera view is re established The Delete All ROIs button becomes active which enables you to delete all the ROIs for the selected cam era Figure 6 5 shows a VMD configuration for a camera view which has three VMD ROls one of which partially overlaps another The yellow edge of the selected ROI is not visible where it is overlapped It is possible to draw ROls so that they overlap each other If you select an ROI that is partially overlapped by another its yell
261. tabase nussnossssssssssressrrrerrrrrrrrrnr anna 102 10 7 Playing Exported Video uismmossesrssrrrerrerrssrerrerenrerrerrerrrren rer error reser ennen enn nn 103 10 7 1 Printing images USING SPIAYEF ccseccececeeceeeceseceeseeeceeeaeeseeeseees 106 10 8 Using sPlayer as a Remote Client mnssmossnsssssessressrerresrrrerrerrrrsrrrr rer r ror ana 106 Chapter 11 Searching Recorded Images ccscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenenens 107 11 1 Accessing SearChEXPeM osmossssssssresrsressresrerrorresrenrenrrrr rr rer rr rerna rr rr one nan 107 11 2 Quick Motion SCaCH ssoossossrssrersressresrenr ren rrnr rss rss rar rr rr rar rn R RAR RAR KSR R ARR ann 109 11 3 Advanced Motion Search ccccccccseccseccssecceeceececseesaeeseeeeneeseaeesseess 109 11 3 1 Defining Regions of Interest ROIS nossnsssessessressrssrssrrrsrenrrnrrrrrrrrr innnan 110 11 4 Viewing Search Results nmnsmsmassssssssssrsssrssraenrrer reor ran rrrrrrrr narr arr ran rr r rann ann 112 Chapter 12 Product Options a sssssssssssssssssrssrrsrr rr n s nn RR RAR RR ARR R RR ARR ARR ARR nnne 115 12 1 Super Video Motion Detection SVMD stomsessrsssassressrssrrerrrnrrrnrrrr reor ana 115 12 1 1 SVMD Configuration Menu mnmessssrrsressresrresrrsrrrnrrenr rr rr rss rens rss rr rerna annan 116 12 1 2 VMD Menu with the SVMD product OPtiON ssssessesrerrrrerresrerrer error 116 12 1 3 Configuring Object Tracking SVMD cccccccceececeeecceeeeee
262. table dynamically adjusts the storage estimate as you modify your system s configuration Where alarms and or VMD are used for estimation purposes the assumption is made that the active time for these types of events is 25 percent of the total The Super Archive product option allows you to estimate the impact of archiving configuration on your disk usage See section 12 8 Dynamic Re Archiving on page 133 and Appendix A Compression and Archival Ratios on page 139 for more information Protecting Event related recordings As the plettac Sentio server records from cameras and fills the disk space allocated to it it eventually over writes previous recordings To avoid overwriting data that may be significant the system provides event stacks which protect event related recordings from being overwritten These stacks represent an amount of disk space reserved for the most recent event related recordings As shown in Figure 3 2 a new event added to the stack of size n emerges after n 1 subsequent events occur A separate stack is provided for recordings triggered by the following event types e contact alarms e suspicion alarms 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Devising a Recording Strategy Using the Capacity menu you can configure the stack size for each type of event The size you specify has implications for the recording capacity of the system For more information see section 3 2 2 Calculating recording cap
263. tasks except remote configuration NetManager has the same look and feel as the plettac Sentio server GUI and with a few minor differences pro vides the same functionality NetManager enables hot configuration of any networked server configuration changes take immediate effect without any interruption of service For detailed information refer to the NetManager User Guide 1 4 13 Camera Patrol On the plettac Sentio server you can configure a so called camera patrol to run automatically at specified intervals on any Live mode GUls that are attached to the server When a camera patrol becomes active it cyclically displays a selection of camera views in full screen format The duration for which each camera view appears and the duration and frequency of the patrol are all separately configurable Scheduled camera patrols require no user intervention Patrols have no effect on recording and playback A user monitoring the server in Live mode can easily interrupt an automatic camera patrol to concentrate on a particular camera view Moving the mouse interrupts the camera patrol 1 4 14 Bi Directional Audio With Bi Directional Audio SBDA users of NetManager can transmit live audio data via the server to a sin gle external speaker The plettac Sentio server provides a single channel for audio output If the associated camera also has audio input a two way conversation is possible with people in the monitored location 1 4 15 Se
264. te You cannot modify the user group of an account once it has been created Table 8 5 4 When you are satisfied that you have configured the user account correctly click on the OK Configuration access provided by user privileges button 5 You can create other accounts in the same way When you have finished creating user accounts click the OK button to commit the changes and close the Configuration Console 8 4 2 Limiting the cameras a user may view You may have covert cameras in your installation that you do not wish all users to know about or view When you create a user and assign it to the Standard User group the Covert Camera panel of the Users tab is enabled An example is shown in Figure 8 6 Users Users and Groups Access Rights ras pwora standard Manager Administrator User Name Group Protection Usei Administrator Administrator Playback A P A Guest Standard User 00 Export Configuration Dual Authentication ar Covert Cameras All C 01 fred C 02 Camera 02 03 Camera 03 C 04 Camera 04 C 05 Camera 05 None Flip Update 06 Camera 06 C 07 Camera 07 Add User Remove User Change Password C 08 Camera 08 x About CLOSE APPLICATION Ol Cancel Apply Figure 8 6 The Covert Camera panel of the Users tab All cameras analogue or IP attached to a server can be designated as covert With the particular user high lighted select t
265. tes and OSD set to 5 seconds In this situation the Camera Sabotage Detected text disappears from the screen after 5 seconds but event recording continues for a total of 10 minutes During this period the CSD event is still active so NO NEW CSD events can be triggered CSD Sensitivity is the percentage measure by which a camera view can be affected before an alarm event is triggered The higher the number the smaller the change allowed For example a high sensitivity for Ob scure means that only a small amount of the view can be blocked before the alarm is triggered Click in the Sensitivity column for a camera and either type the value directly or use the spinner arrows to change the sensitivity level Camera Hene Focus Visibility AE 01 Camera 01 U2 Camera 02 wi x wi 20s 3 Camera 03 4 Camera 04 12 5 Video Sequencer 7 INFORMATION The video sequencer is an extra hardware option which can be used to display a timed selection of cameras on up to 4 sequence monitors each with a text overlay To enable Sequencer functionality the Seq command line option must be specified in the start up properties of the plettac server See Appendix G Run Time Configuration on page 159 Each system can have up to four sequence monitor outputs remote spot monitors The sequencer displays the camera views through the spot monitor s in a continual cyclical sequence 1
266. than one local hard drive installed 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual N NAS NCTV Network Bandwidth NMS NTSC Ohm OSD PAL PC PDF PSTN PSU PTZ ROI Sequencer SVMD Streaming PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Network Attached Storage A network disk available for recording Networked Closed Circuit Television A CCTV system that can be accessed across a network The available capacity of a network Network Management System National Television Standards Committee TV and video format used in the United States Canada and Japan which divides the picture into 60 fields and uses interlaced scanning to update the picture on screen The electron beam passes over the odd numbered fields in 1 60 of a second and then updates the even numbered fields in the next scan This means the television presents a com plete picture 30 times a second The plettac 60 60L and plettac 480L are designed for use with NTSC cameras Unit of electrical resistance or impedance CCTV cameras usually have 50 Ohms On screen Display Phase Alternation by Line TV and Video format used in European countries and other parts of the world in which the electron beam passes over the entire screen 50 times per second which means the television presents a complete picture 25 times a second Personal computer Portable Document Format Adobe Corporation s electronic publishing format based on Postscript Public S
267. the ATM which the ATM is programmed to generate each time a card is used as described section J 2 4 Address This is the string of characters prefixing each transaction line and includes any spaces and non printable characters Both an ATM or multiplexor can generate a string of characters to be used as address If both an ATM and a multiplexor generate address strings this field is a combination of the strings generated by both devices This field cannot contain the line terminator of the device connected to the COM Port whether it is an ATM or multiplexor You can also specify non printable characters for address by using the back slash character V followed by the three digits of an ASCII code For example 1014 stands for character having ASCII code value of 14 To display the back slash character itself use W Please note that this field must be unique among all ATMs using the same multiplexor 5 ID A non zero identifier of value 0 255 which must be unique among all ATMs using the same multiplexor 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual J 4 3 Purge Old ATM Transaction Recordings J 4 4 will be deleted ATM Integration Save and Load Configuration On the bottom of ATM Configuration dialog box there is dropdown list which allows you to specify the number of days after which any ATM transactions recorded by the plettac server for searching purpose JO After you have set up the configuration you sh
268. the changeover time your plettac FXL server will appear to have a one hour gap in any recorded data from any cameras H 2 Moving from Daylight Saving Time In the Autumn clocks are put back one hour For example in the U K the official time jumps from 02 00 back to 01 00 All recorded audio and video data is available but how the software accesses it during play back and export will vary depending on how you have setup your recording H 2 1 Constant recording during the changeover When constant recording has been implemented the timeline on the playback console will show a duplicate hour for example from 01 00 to 02 00 If you place the cursor anywhere in the timeline prior to the first 01 00 and click Play the recorded data will be displayed and continue until 01 59 59 and then jump to 02 00 00 and continue the playback missing the second hour To view any of the data recorded during the second hour you must place the cursor on the timeline after the second 01 00 The playback controls then operate in the standard manner to access any data from the du plicate hour H 2 2 Event based recording during the changeover Events are displayed in local time and so any events that occur during the duplicate hour are visible on the time line against the first hour s recordings i e Contact Alarms red and VMD yellow For example if an event occurs at 01 20 BST and is set to record for 15 minutes it will appear on the timeline as sho
269. these settings SearchExpert Camera eE AL 40 100 Jot Camera O1 DEMO F L Sensitivity oel E lS Motion Search f Quick C Advanced Figure 11 3 Default settings for SearchExpert Sensitivity is a measure of how much difference between two images will be detected A higher value means that very subtle changes will be seen such as slight movement of an object or small change in light levels whereas a lower value will mean that gross changes will be found such as movement across a frame Select the cameras you want to search from the list of available cameras and click Add to make them avail able in the Camera Selection list SearchExpert finds the first available image for the camera in the specified time period and displays this as the background image in the display area of the control panel The Region of Interest ROI defaults to the full screen size Camera Selection Result Merge Intersect Camera Selection Result Merge Intersect Camera 01 Camera O1 DEMO FXL 11 Camera 11 DEMO FxL Delete Selected Delete All Search Remove Search NOTE If there are no images available at the start of the time period specified the message Background image not available is displayed in the SearchExpert console display area You can either click the Search button or right click on a camera selection and select Search from the pop up menu SearchExpert searches the recorded i
270. tion is interfered with such as if it is moved or obscured For more information refer to section 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD on page 125 Pre defined Recording Schedules You can define and save preset recording schedules that enable the server to automatically modify the way it records from particular cameras over time For instance the schedule for your interior cameras might define constant recording during normal business hours but switch to event based recording outside business hours thus saving disk space A schedule for exterior cameras might continue to use constant recording throughout the day Playback while recording The plettac Sentio server lets you play back up to 1 recorded video tracks simultaneously while still recording new data from cameras Each video stream is decompressed and played back at the required speed with audio Improved Live display The L series plettac Sentio servers have extra hardware to improve the image update rate in Live display mode while non L servers without the extra hardware display images at the capture rate or a little less 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual plettac the complete solution for networked video 1 4 10 Extended Video Retention Because plettac Sentio servers record to a circular file on disk the more images you record and the higher the quality of those images the sooner the recorded images will be overwritten Images th
271. tions button becomes active D WARNING Do not use the Browse button to select a CD or DVD writer drive if it didn t appear automatically in the Target list when the Export utility started If you do the export will fail 3 Click the Advanced button to specify the following writer options for the Export Target shown in Table 10 2 Option Description Session Options Append Radio button that specifies the data you export be added to any data already on the CD DVD This is the default setting T Overwrite Radio button that specifies the data you export overwrite any data already on the CD DVD Unless you also use the Erase Disk option the old data remains on the CD or DVD but is no longer accessible from Windows Completion Options Verify Data Click this check box to have the CD DVD writer perform a check to verify the integrity of the Exported data after burning it to the disk Permanently Write Protect Click this check box to have the CD DVD writer close the CD or DVD to any further writing once the current Export is complete Does not apply to rewriteable CD DVDs Erase Disk For rewriteable media only Click this check box to have the CD writer erase all data on the disk before it writes the Export files t Append is not supported for the DVD RW format PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 93 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE NOTE 94 Table 10 2 Advanced export options 4 Click O
272. to approximately 10 of its original size The file size of 1 second of uncompressed quality 1 audio data is 8000 bytes When recorded at quality 2 compressed using the GSM codec the equivalent audio data takes up 1626 bytes Table A 1 shows the size to which one camera s recording would grow over time for different combinations of Image Quality and Recording Rate ips Recording Rate 1 ips 1 ips 1 ips 25 ips 25 ips Image Compression Kb per Mb per Gb per Gb per Gb per Quality Ratio sec hour day hour day C EN KN EN KN AN EA C EN E CN CN EA C CN CAN EL CN CAN KE C CN CIN SN CN CN Table A 1 File size increases for different ips rates image qualities and recording durations All values shown are approximate only PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 139 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 A 1 1 Adjustment for different CIF resolutions The values in the table above are correct when the resolution of 2CIF single field is used When using other CIF resolutions the values for Kb per sec Mb per hour Gb per day and Gb per hour must be adjusted by the following factors Resolution Adjustment A 2 Archival Compression Ratios If you have purchased the Super Archive product option you can archive some or all of your recorded data to compress it further on disk and conserves disk space for new recordings When you archive recordings you can specify one of the following compression algorithms e High
273. ttempt to attach an IP camera to more than one plettac Sentio server While it is possible to connect an IP camera in this way the IP camera would be unable to send images to each server at its full ips 5 1 The IP Cameras Tab Using the IP Cameras tab of the Configuration Console you can perform the following tasks for any of the IP cameras connected to your system PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Customising IP Camera Names Enabling or Disabling Live Mode Display Specifying when a Camera should Record For example you may want the camera s covering the lobby of your building to 19 March 2009 35 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 record constantly during normal business hours However outside business hours you may want them to automatically switch to event based recording e Setting the Video Recording Quality e Enabling Alarm Detection e Enabling Video Motion Detection VMD Cameras IP Cameras Event nto Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious esp 17 JVC 1 18 uve 2 19 Empty 20 Empty 21 Empty IP Address Image Settings YC N C30U 10 201 21 201 MAC Address 00 80 88 01 26 67 Version 4 30 22 Empty Resolution 704 x 480 v Quality Extended Settings Recording Settings Record Time Always v IPS i v Enable Archive Archive IPS Y I YMD M csp 23 Empty 24 Empty 25 Empty 26 Empty 2
274. tton to select the Live mode of operation for monitoring CCTV cameras in real time The plettac server captures video and audio input from up to 16 cameras and 1 microphones and displays it in the main screen If you have Pan Tilt Zoom cameras connected you can use the PTZ controls in Live mode Camera Patrols can be configured to automatically cycle through a series of camera views on the main screen while the system is in Live mode See Chapter 9 Live Mode Operations on page 77 for more details The Playback Button Click this button to select the Playback mode of operation to review previously recorded video and audio data from the plettac server s hard drives See Chapter 10 Playback Mode Operations on page 89 for more details The Supervisor Button Click this button to select the Supervisor mode of operation This presents you with a login dialog if pass word protection is enabled which when completed successfully starts up the Configuration interface of the plettac server See Chapter 4 Analogue Camera Configuration on page 27 for more details 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual The plettac User Interface 2 5 Screen Layout Buttons plettac Sentio provides you with 6 different screen layouts from which to choose in either Live or Playback modes The available options are as follows e 16 tile mosaic 4x4 camera views of equal size e 9 tile mosaic 8x3 camera views of equal size e 4
275. ty Sched Engin Log Au dio BIA Users Options Suspic CSD Video Motion Detection YMD Camera 03 Camera 03 SVYMD v Sensitivity Level H 70 Output On Display Duration before alarm f5 secs Learning Duration f5 secs r Object Settings 30 75 100 Size 0 100 Abandoned Object Occlusion z r Delete AQI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 12 6 Drawing an Abandoned Object ROI for a Camera 2 Select the camera for which you want to configure VMD from the drop down list of cameras 3 Click the Abandoned Object check box in the Mode area This activates the Object Settings area 4 Decide whether your want to apply the VMD to the whole camera view or to a portion of it As it is often not possible to predict where an object will be abandoned it is probably best to apply the configuration to the full camera view ROI However if there are areas where it acceptable for objects to be deposited or stopped for example the hard shoulder of a motorway you might choose to draw an ROI explicitly Figure 12 6 above shows a camera view of an Airport concourse in which the default ROI is used to detect abandoned objects that are smaller than a specified size 5 For the plettac server to recognise when the foreign object s are abandoned in the camera view it must learn which objects belong permanently in the ROI In the Learning Duration field you
276. ually set to a higher quality and rate when these situations are detected CSD functionality is described in section 12 4 Camera Sabotage Detection CSD on page 125 Table 6 1 Events that can be used to trigger recording NOTE Certain settings of Record Time in the Camera configuration menu Never On alarm switch and Schedules without alarms or VMD enabled preclude the use of event based recording 6 2 Basic VMD Configuration When you click the VMD tab of the Configuration Console the VMD menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6 1 This section provides an overview of the configurable elements of this menu Detailed configuration proce dures are provided in subsequent sections NOTE If you have purchased the Super VMD SVMD product option the VMD configuration screen contains different options For details see section 12 1 Super Video Motion Detection SVMD 44 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording on page 115 Cameras Event WMD Preview Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious Video Motion Detection VMD Camera 03 Camera 03 Sensitivity Level __ 95 Delete AOI Delete All Start Test About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 6 1 Configuring basic VMD for a camera Table 6 1 describes the elements of the VMD configuration menu GUI Element Description Camera Provides a
277. uire and if they exceed the system s maximum dis plays the same warning See Appendix A Compression and Archival Ratios on page 139 for more infor mation Exceeded maximum ips Reduce in interval on Monday at 00 01 Figure 5 7 ips exceeded warning message If the message in Figure 5 7 appears press OK and review the last configuration change you made in the Camera IP Camera Event or Schedules tabs If the increased recording rate for that camera is essential you must reduce the ips used by other cameras to keep within the system s maximum recording rate Enabling Alarm Detection The plettac Sentio server can accept input from external alarm systems via ports at the rear of the unit You can associate an alarm event with a particular IP camera so that the frame of its camera view turns red whenever the alarm occurs Examples of alarm events could be the opening of a door the raising of a car park barrier or the operation of a turnstile To enable Alarm detection for an IP camera click the Alarm check box This enables the system to receive alarm signals that are associated with the camera view Further configuration is required on the Event tab of the Configuration Console To reduce the amount of data recorded on disk you can configure the plettac server to record from cer tain cameras only when alarm events occur See section 6 4 Associating Alarms with Cameras on page 49 for more information Enabling Vi
278. ult ROI which is the entire camera view 3 Before applying the configuration you can test its performance by clicking the Start Test button This opens a special preview screen shown in Figure 6 3 on page 47 which shows images currently being captured from the selected camera If there are objects moving in the camera view they are outlined on the test screen with a red coloured box If there is currently no motion in the camera view you may need to arrange for someone to move in the camera view for your test If you notice that some objects such as lights trees or plants or their shadows are causing false VMD events as they move in the wind you may decide further configure the VMD Dismiss the 46 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual Event Based Recording text screen by clicking the in the top right hand corner EE YMD Test Figure 6 3 Test of VMD for the default ROI 4 To modify the amount of movement that triggers a VMD event move the Sensitivity slider from left to right 1 When you are satisfied that the configuration triggers the kinds of VMD events in which you are interested click on OK to commit your changes 6 3 2 VMD configuration using ROIs It may not suit your needs to have VMD triggered by every movement in the camera view or by movement in every part of the camera view Part of the camera view may be prone to constant change with passing traffic and pedestrians or with foliage movi
279. ust first be decompressed by the server which increases the CPU loading Disabling the Live mode will increase system performance especially if there are a large number of IP cameras connected to the server Setting the Video Recording Quality Both the resolution and the selected quality level affect the size and appearance of recorded images In the Image Settings panel the options in the Resolution drop down menu are specific to a type of camera Some IP cameras limit the number of ips that can be selected depending on the resolution chosen For example JVC cameras can only be set to a maximum of 3 ips at the 704x480 resolution To set the quality at which you wish to record from a camera click in the Quality field and select a quality setting from 1 to 11 where 1 represents the highest quality and 11 the lowest Quality 5 is approximately equivalent to SVHS quality The default quality setting for an IP camera is 4 The image received from an IP camera is used for both recording and preview If you change an IP camera s quality from the Configuration console this will immediately be reflected in the recording The lower the value you specify the higher the quality of the images recorded by the camera and the more disk space they require You can save on disk space by setting a high value lower quality for the quality of constant recording and use event based recording to record at a higher quality when an event occurs See sect
280. ver supports a range of PTZ and Dome cameras The protocols for some are given in Appendix E Remote Control Commands on page 151 For a full list contact the plettac support team PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 79 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 These types of cameras attached to the system can be controlled via the PTZ Control Dialog or via an op tional plug in joystick In Live mode click the PTZ button to display or collapse the PTZ Control Dialog This section describes the configuration to integrate PTZ cameras with the Live mode operations of the plettac Sentio server 9 5 1 Configuration of PTZ cameras If you have PTZ enabled cameras connected to your plettac Sentio server and have started the system with the PTZ command line option a PTZ tab appears on the Configuration Console Cameras Event wap Preview capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Sequencer PTZ Juses Options Suspicious cap l Click this tab to open the PTZ Configuration menu shown in Figure 9 4 Cam Event VMD Pre Patrol Capa Sche Engin Log Audio Sequ PTZ Jusers Opt Suspi CSD Camera Pot J Protocol TD Configure Port Function Keys About CLOSE APPLICATION Cancel Apply Figure 9 4 PTZ configuration settings Table 9 1 describes the fields of the PTZ Configuration Me
281. w Capacity Schedules Engineering Log Audio Users Options Suspicious GSD Camera Spe ae Movement of a camera is one of the types of sabotage that can be detected The three types of sabotage detectable are outlined below e Focus Visibility Focus is where a camera s lens is deliberately manipulated to obscure the scene being viewed Similarly Visibility is whereby an image is deliberately obscured by spraying a liquid over the lens of the camera A camera viewing recording an external scene on a foggy day will respond to the situation and treat it as camera sabotage e Move Sabotage by movement is where a camera is deliberately turned to change the image being viewed or recorded e Obscure Sabotage by obscuring is where an object is deliberately placed in front of a camera to block the image being viewed or recorded By using comparison of images received the plettac server continually monitors the scene to determine whether a camera has been sabotaged and alert the operator 126 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 User Manual NOTE Product Options You can adjust how long the warning message remains on screen by clicking in the on screen display OSD Time column and selecting the required time Focus Visibility Move Obscure Sensitivity The OSD time can be set to be shorter than the event duration time selected on the Camera tab For example the event duration might be set to 10 minu
282. witch is activated A purpose built toggle switch is available for this pur pose Press the switch once to begin recording A red light indicates that the switch is in the record position To stop recording from the IP camera press the switch again The light goes out 42 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 Security UK Limited letta Cuapter 6 Event Based Recording The VMD and Alarms features of plettac Sentio FXL enable you to configure the system to record only when an event occurs or to increase the frequency or quality of recording when an event occurs This can reduce further the amount of data you need to store on disk and enable you to quickly identify significant occur rences in Live mode display and in Playback mode This chapter describes how to configure the plettac Sentio FXL so that it records from cameras when specific events occur It contains the following sections e plettac System Events e Associating Alarms with Cameras e Configuring VMD for a Camera e Associating Alarms with Cameras e Configuring Event Based Recording e Configuring the Suspicious Alarm e Configuring Dial Up on Alarm e Configuring Acknowledgements to Stop Recording 6 1 plettac System Events i INFORMATION You can configure the plettac Sentio server to recognise certain types of occurrence and take special actions when these Events occur By associating an event with a particular camera you can configure the plettac
283. witched Telephone Network The world wide aggregation of circuit switching telephone networks that has evolved to carry analog voice data he world s collection of interconnected voice oriented public telephone networks both commercial and government owned It s sometimes referred to as the Plain Old Telephone Service POTS Power Supply Unit Pan Tilt Zoom Features of certain CCTV cameras that enable the user to control the position and field of vision of the camera See Dome Camera Region of Interest Area drawn with the mouse on a camera view in which VMD or SVMD rules are uniquely applied See VMD and SVMD An extra hardware option not available with plettac E amp plettac EX that can display a selection of cameras in a timed sequence on up to 4 monitors each with a text overlay facility Super Video Motion Detection Enhanced VMD functionality that can be config ured for one camera attached to the plettac FXL SVMD is more discriminating than standard VMD and can be configured to raise events when objects e move in a particular direction e move in a configured speed range e disappear from where they should be e appear where they should not be Delivery of a data stream video audio or both across a network to a client that plays the data as it loads without saving it to disk 19 March 2009 1 79 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 T TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol A two layer commu
284. wn below EVENT DATE aa 2671072003 gt PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 163 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 NOTE NOTE H 2 3 164 If an event or alarm then occurs at 01 40 GMT i e after the changeover it will be displayed as having oc curred during the first of the duplicate hours as shown below As there is no overlap there is no duplicate hour shown on the timeline aa 26 10 2003 ane lt lt ER gt gt gt a Ba If the second event occurs at the same time as the first or the recording periods overlap a duplicate hour will be displayed aa 26 10 2003 aa aa COCO sa lex All events are always recorded and can be also accessed by using the Event Review function Event Review displays in local time the list may appear to be incorrectly sorted For example if the first event occurs at 01 35 BST and the second at 01 10 GMT Event Review will show them in the correct temporal order i e the first above the second in the list Double clicking from the Log tab will only take you to the first hour and never to the duplicate hour Exporting data Export of data over the daylight saving changeover hour will result in up to four output files on the export me dia device This covers the time up to the first hour the first hour the second hour and data after the second hour 19 March 2009 PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 gt plettac curity
285. y Area System Clock Mode Selection Buttons Screen Layout Buttons Camera List Master Audio Controls Message Area in Live mode Playback Console Configuration Console 2 1 Overview of the Main Screen Figure 2 1 shows the Main screen of the plettac Sentio server application which comprises the following default elements PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 A System Clock Qmmog Ww Display Area Mode Selection Buttons Screen Layout Buttons Camera List Message Area in Live mode Playback Console in Playback mode On Screen Keyboard and Master Audio Controls 19 March 2009 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 These elements are described in detail in the subsequent sections of this chapter Input 01 2005 04 25 14 02 45 1 Input 04 2005 04 25 14 02 45 4 Input 03 2005 04 25 14 02 45 3 Figure 2 1 The plettac Sentio server GUI interface If you have purchased any of the optional features for your plettac intelligent video management system and configured the appropriate command line options the following elements also appear on the main screen e PTZ Control Button for attached cameras with Pan Tilt Zoom functions e Microphone Controls for Super Bi directional Audio SBDA Threshold 3 E mm 2 2 Display Area The Display Area is where the application displays the live video input it captures from cameras and the recorded video it plays back Using the screen layout
286. yed indicated whether the camera was successfully added When you have finished naming the cameras being added to the plettac Sentio server click the Close button on the Add IP Camera dialog box Any IP cameras added to the server automatically appear on the following tabs of the Configuration Console and can be treated in the same way as any other camera e Event the only restriction with Event recording is that an IP camera cannot be associated with an IP alarm but can be associated with alarms connected directly to the server e VMD e Patrol e Capacity e Suspicious Customising IP Camera Names The numbering of the default input locations for IP cameras depends on the number of video capture cards installed in the plettac Sentio server For example if you have an 8 channel system two capture cards the IP camera slots are numbered 9 to 24 These slots are shown as buttons on the IP Cameras tab As IP cameras are added to a server each camera is assigned to the next available input The name entered when the cam era was added appears on the appropriate button If necessary you can change the name of a camera 1 Select the camera by clicking the appropriate button 2 Enter a new name in the Name field of the IP Camera Properties panel Try to make your camera names distinguishable using the first 10 characters because some PL UG FXL PAL ENG 4 4 03 19 March 2009 37 Intelligent Video Processing plettac FXL v4 4 D22 NO
287. ystem you can allocate storage on networked devices for plettac Sentio recordings To enable this some configuration is required on both the plettac Sentio server and on the net worked machine 1 Ona machine running Microsoft Windows in the same network as the plettac Sentio server enable file sharing on a drive 2 Exit the plettac Sentio Server application 3 Map the shared drive on the remote machine to a drive name on the plettac Sentio server 4 Add the NAS run time parameter to the properties of the plettac Sentio server For additional information refer to Appendix G Run Time Configuration on page 159 5 Restart the plettac Sentio Server application 6 In the Configuration Console open the Engineering menu The newly mapped drive is displayed in the Available Hard Disks box You can now allocate the drive for recording as described in section 3 4 1 3 4 3 Removing a hard disk from allocated storage To de allocate a hard disk that has been allocated for recording use the following steps 1 Select the disk s entry in the Disks to Record box The Remove button becomes active 2 Click the Remove button The following confirmation dialog is displayed AN Selected Hard Disk s F 4 i in use Removing drive will delete all previously recorded data Do you wish to continue Cancel Figure 3 5 Storage disk removal confirmation 1 If you are sure you do not need any of the data on the disk press OK NOTE I

Intelligent Video Processing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents